You can not select more than 25 topics
Topics must start with a letter or number, can include dashes ('-') and can be up to 35 characters long.
9691 lines
350 KiB
9691 lines
350 KiB
7 years ago
|
# $Id: all-escapes.txt,v 1.32 2005/09/14 12:00:06 ben Exp $
|
||
|
|
||
|
# This file is hoped to document all the escape sequences supported by
|
||
|
# terminals that are vaguely compliant with ECMA-48 and friends.
|
||
|
|
||
|
# Changes should be submitted to <bjh21@bjh21.me.uk>
|
||
|
|
||
|
# It includes everything from:
|
||
|
# <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt> 1999-05-16
|
||
|
# <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>
|
||
|
# 1993-02-01
|
||
|
# <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>1998-09-18
|
||
|
# <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>
|
||
|
# 1999-05-16
|
||
|
# <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/xterm_controls.txt> 1999-10-12
|
||
|
# <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
|
||
|
# 1999-11-13
|
||
|
# ECMA-48 5th Ed. control functions (section 8.3, annex F)
|
||
|
# Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
# SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D)
|
||
|
# UnixWare 7 display(7)
|
||
|
# IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
|
||
|
# VT220 Reference manual (<URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/>, EK-VT220-RM)
|
||
|
# <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html> 1999-11-24
|
||
|
# <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html> 1999-12-01
|
||
|
# <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9> (wy75)
|
||
|
# 1999-07-19
|
||
|
# <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip#TERM-EMU.DOC>
|
||
|
# 1999-09-13
|
||
|
# <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm> 1999-04-19
|
||
|
# <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm> 2004-09-27
|
||
|
# <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm> 2004-09-27
|
||
|
# <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm> 1999-04-19
|
||
|
# <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm> 2001-05-10
|
||
|
# iBCS2 description in ESR's termtypes.master version 10.2.7
|
||
|
# Reflection Terminal Reference Manual for ADDS, ANSI, DG, VT, WYSE, and
|
||
|
# Unisys Hosts; Version 7.0; September 1998; published by WRQ Inc.
|
||
|
# DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 (Appendices C, E, and G)
|
||
|
# OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
# X Consortium Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
|
||
|
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Section: *** C0 controls ***
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: NUL (^@)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: NUL
|
||
|
Description: Null
|
||
|
|
||
|
NUL is used for media-fill or time-fill. NUL characters may be
|
||
|
inserted into, or removed from, a data stream without affecting the
|
||
|
information content of that stream, but such action may affect the
|
||
|
information layout and/or the control of equipment.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.98
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: SOH (^A)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SOH
|
||
|
Description: Start of heading
|
||
|
|
||
|
SOH is used to indicate the beginning of a heading.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of SOH is defined in ISO 1745.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.127
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
|
||
|
Also used as a prefix for "UnixWindows" commands.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>
|
||
|
Status: ??? private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: STX (^B)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: STX
|
||
|
Description: Start of text
|
||
|
|
||
|
STX is used to indicate the beginning of a text and the end of a
|
||
|
heading.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of STX is defined in ISO 1745.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.146
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ETX (^C)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ETX
|
||
|
Description: End of text
|
||
|
|
||
|
ETX is used to indicate the end of a text.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of ETX is defined in ISO 1745.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.50
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: EOT (^D)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: EOT
|
||
|
Description: End of transmission
|
||
|
|
||
|
EOT is used to indicate the conclusion of the transmission of one or
|
||
|
more texts.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of EOT is defined in ISO 1745.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.45
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ENQ (^E)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ENQ
|
||
|
Description: Enquiry
|
||
|
|
||
|
ENQ is transmitted by a sender as a request for a response from a
|
||
|
receiver.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of ENQ is defined in ISO 1745.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.44
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ACK (^F)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ACK
|
||
|
Description: Acknowledge
|
||
|
|
||
|
ACK is transmitted by a receiver as an affirmative response to the sender.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of ACK is defined in ISO 1745.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.1
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: BEL (^G)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: BEL
|
||
|
Description: Bell
|
||
|
|
||
|
BEL is used when there is a need to call for attention; it may control
|
||
|
alarm or attention devices.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.3
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: BS (^H)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: BS
|
||
|
Description: Back space
|
||
|
|
||
|
BS causes the active data position to be moved one character position
|
||
|
in the data component in the direction opposite to that of the
|
||
|
implicit movement. The direction of the implicit movement depends on
|
||
|
the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT DIRECTION (SIMD).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.5
|
||
|
|
||
|
BS (0x08, ^H) backspaces one column (but not past the
|
||
|
beginning of the line);
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: HT (^I)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: HT
|
||
|
Description: Character tabulation
|
||
|
|
||
|
HT causes the active presentation position to be moved to the
|
||
|
following character tabulation stop in the presentation component.
|
||
|
|
||
|
In addition, if that following character tabulation stop has been set
|
||
|
by TABULATION ALIGN CENTRE (TAC), TABULATION ALIGN LEADING EDGE
|
||
|
(TALE), TABULATION ALIGN TRAILING EDGE (TATE) or TABULATION CENTRED ON
|
||
|
CHARACTER (TCC), HT indicates the beginning of a string of text which
|
||
|
is to be positioned within a line according to the properties of that
|
||
|
tabulation stop. The end of the string is indicated by the next
|
||
|
occurrence of HT or CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) or NEXT LINE (NEL) in the
|
||
|
data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.60
|
||
|
|
||
|
HT (0x09, ^I) goes to the next tab stop or to the end of
|
||
|
the line if there is no earlier tab stop;
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: LF (^J)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: LF
|
||
|
Description: Line feed
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, LF
|
||
|
causes the active presentation position to be moved to the
|
||
|
corresponding character position of the following line in the
|
||
|
presentation component.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, LF causes
|
||
|
the active data position to be moved to the corresponding character
|
||
|
position of the following line in the data component.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.74
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: VT (^K)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: VT
|
||
|
Description: Line tabulation
|
||
|
|
||
|
VT causes the active presentation position to be moved in the
|
||
|
presentation component to the corresponding character position on the
|
||
|
line at which the following line tabulation stop is set.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.161
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: VT (^K)
|
||
|
Description: Reverse Line-feed
|
||
|
|
||
|
The cursor moves up one line, remaining at the same character position
|
||
|
on the line. If the cursor is already at the top line, nothing
|
||
|
happens.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D)
|
||
|
Status: Sun private; clashes with ECMA-48 VT
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: FF (^L)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: FF
|
||
|
Description: Form feed
|
||
|
|
||
|
FF causes the active presentation position to be moved to the
|
||
|
corresponding character position of the line at the page home position
|
||
|
of the next form or page in the presentation component. The page home
|
||
|
position is established by the parameter value of SET PAGE HOME (SPH).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.51
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CR (^M)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CR
|
||
|
Description: Carriage return
|
||
|
|
||
|
The effect of CR depends on the setting of the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT
|
||
|
MODE (DCSM) and on the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT
|
||
|
DIRECTION (SIMD).
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION and
|
||
|
with the parameter value of SIMD equal to 0, CR causes the active
|
||
|
presentation position to be moved to the line home position of the
|
||
|
same line in the presentation component. The line home position is
|
||
|
established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
|
||
|
|
||
|
With a parameter value of SIMD equal to 1, CR causes the active
|
||
|
presentation position to be moved to the line limit position of the
|
||
|
same line in the presentation component. The line limit position is
|
||
|
established by the parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL).
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA and with a
|
||
|
parameter value of SIMD equal to 0, CR causes the active data position
|
||
|
to be moved to the line home position of the same line in the data
|
||
|
component. The line home position is established by the parameter
|
||
|
value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
|
||
|
|
||
|
With a parameter value of SIMD equal to 1, CR causes the active data
|
||
|
position to be moved to the line limit position of the same line in
|
||
|
the data component. The line limit position is established by the
|
||
|
parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.15
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: LS1 (^N)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: LS1
|
||
|
Description: Locking-shift one
|
||
|
|
||
|
LS1 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
|
||
|
bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of LS1 is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
LS1 is used in 8-bit environments only; in 7-bit environments
|
||
|
SHIFT-OUT (SO) is used instead.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 8.3.76
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: SO (^N)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SO
|
||
|
Description: Shift-out
|
||
|
|
||
|
SO is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
|
||
|
bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of SO is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
SO is used in 7-bit environments only; in 8-bit environments
|
||
|
LOCKING-SHIFT ONE (LS1) is used instead.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.126
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: LS0 (^O)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: LS0
|
||
|
Description: Locking-shift zero
|
||
|
|
||
|
LS0 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
|
||
|
bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of LS0 is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
LS0 is used in 8-bit environments only; in 7-bit environments SHIFT-IN
|
||
|
(SI) is used instead.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.75
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: SI (^O)
|
||
|
Mnmonic: SI
|
||
|
Description: Shift-in
|
||
|
|
||
|
SI is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
|
||
|
bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of SI is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
SI is used in 7-bit environments only; in 8-bit environments
|
||
|
LOCKING-SHIFT ZERO (LS0) is used instead.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-35 5th Ed. 8.3.119
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DLE (^P)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DLE
|
||
|
Description: Data link escape
|
||
|
|
||
|
DLE is used exclusively to provide supplementary transmission control
|
||
|
functions.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of DLE is defined in ISO 1745.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 8.3.33
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DC1 (^Q)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DC1
|
||
|
Description: Device control one
|
||
|
|
||
|
DC1 is primarily intended for turning on or starting an ancillary
|
||
|
device. If it is not required for this purpose, it may be used to
|
||
|
restore a device to the basic mode of operation (see also DC2 and
|
||
|
DC3), or any other device control function not provided by other DCs.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
When used for data flow control, DC1 is sometimes called "X-ON".
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.28
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DC2 (^R)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DC2
|
||
|
Description: Device control two
|
||
|
|
||
|
DC2 is primarily intended for turning on or starting an ancillary
|
||
|
device. If it is not required for this purpose, it may be used to set
|
||
|
a device to a special mode of operation (in which case DC1 is used to
|
||
|
restore the device to the basic mode), or for any other device control
|
||
|
function not provided by other DCs.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.29
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DC3 (^S)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DC3
|
||
|
Description: Device control three
|
||
|
|
||
|
DC3 is primarily intended for turning off or stopping an ancillary
|
||
|
device. This function may be a secondary level stop, for example wait,
|
||
|
pause, stand-by or halt (in which case DC1 is used to restore normal
|
||
|
operation). If it is not required for this purpose, it may be used for
|
||
|
any other device control function not provided by other DCs.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
When used for data flow control, DC3 is sometimes called "X-OFF".
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 8.3.30
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DC4 (^T)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DC4
|
||
|
Description: Device control four
|
||
|
|
||
|
DC4 is primarily intended for turning off, stopping or interrupting an
|
||
|
ancillary device. If it is not required for this purpose, it may be
|
||
|
used for any other device control function not provided by other DCs.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 8.3.31
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DC4 (^T)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Used by the TDSMP (Terminal Device Session Management Protocol) on DEC
|
||
|
VT4xx terminals. The protocol is patented (US 4791566 & 5165020).
|
||
|
Commands seems to end with ST.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
[paraphrased]
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: NAK (^U)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: NAK
|
||
|
Description: Negative acknowledge
|
||
|
|
||
|
NAK is transmitted by a receiver as a negative response to the sender.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of NAK is defined in ISO 1745.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.84
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: SYN (^V)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SYN
|
||
|
Description: Synchronous idle
|
||
|
|
||
|
SYN is used by a synchronous transmission system in the absence of any
|
||
|
other character (idle condition) to provide a signal from which
|
||
|
synchronism may be achieved or retained between data terminal
|
||
|
equipment.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of SYN is defined in ISO 1745.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.150
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
|
||
|
Also used as an introducer for AVATAR commands
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>
|
||
|
Status: ??? private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ETB (^W)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ETB
|
||
|
Description: End of transmission block
|
||
|
|
||
|
ETB is used to indicate the end of a block of data where the data are
|
||
|
divided into such blocks for transmission purposes.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of ETB is defined in ISO 1745.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.49
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CAN (^X)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CAN
|
||
|
Description: Cancel
|
||
|
|
||
|
CAN is used to indicate that the data preceding it in the data stream
|
||
|
is in error. As a result, this data shall be ignored. The specific
|
||
|
meaning of this control function shall be defined for each application
|
||
|
and/or between sender and recipient.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.6
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: EM (^Y)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: EM
|
||
|
Description: End of medium
|
||
|
|
||
|
EM is used to identify the physical end of a medium, or the end of the
|
||
|
used portion of a medium, or the end of the wanted portion of data
|
||
|
recorded on a medium.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.42
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: SUB (^Z)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SUB
|
||
|
Description: Substitute
|
||
|
|
||
|
SUB is used in the place of a character that has been found to be
|
||
|
invalid or in error. SUB is intended to be introduced by automatic
|
||
|
means.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.148
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC (^[)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ESC
|
||
|
Description: Escape
|
||
|
|
||
|
ESCAPE is a control character used for code extension purposes. It
|
||
|
causes the meaning of a limited number of the bit combinations
|
||
|
following it in a CC-data-element to be changed. These bit
|
||
|
combinations, together with the preceding bit combination that
|
||
|
represents the ESC character, constitute an escape sequence.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Escape sequences provide the coded representations of
|
||
|
code-identification functions and of some types of control
|
||
|
functions. The various uses of escape sequences are specified in
|
||
|
clause 13. Code identification functions are specified in clauses 14
|
||
|
and 15.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-35 6th Ed. 6.2.2
|
||
|
|
||
|
An escape sequence shall consist of two or more bytes. In an 8-bit
|
||
|
code a byte shall be an 8-bit combination. In a 7-bit code a byte
|
||
|
shall be a 7-bit combination.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The first byte of an escape sequence shall be the bit combination
|
||
|
representing the ESCAPE character and the last shall be known as the
|
||
|
Final Byte. An escape sequence may also contain one or more bytes
|
||
|
known as Intermediate bytes.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The function represented by an escape sequence shall be determined by
|
||
|
its Intermediate byte(s), if any, and by its Final Byte.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Intermediate bytes shall be any of the 16 positions of column 02 of
|
||
|
the code table; they are denoted by the symbol I.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Final bytes shall be any of the 79 positions of columns 03 to 07 of
|
||
|
the code table excluding position 07/15; they are denoted by the
|
||
|
symbol F.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE 40
|
||
|
Although, in this Standard, escape sequences are specified in terms of
|
||
|
bytes or positions in the code table, the meaning of an escape
|
||
|
sequence is determined only by its bit combinations and it is
|
||
|
unaffected by any meaning assigned to those bit combinations taken
|
||
|
individually.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Bit combinations in columns 00 and 01 and the bit combination 07/15
|
||
|
shall not be used as either Intermediate or Final bytes to construct
|
||
|
an escape sequence. In an 8-bit code bit combinations in columns 08 to
|
||
|
15 also shall not be so used.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE 41
|
||
|
As these prohibited bytes may appear in an escape sequence in error,
|
||
|
it may be necessary within an application to provide methods of
|
||
|
identifying such a situation and of recovering from it, but this is
|
||
|
not covered by this Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-35 6th Ed. 13.1
|
||
|
|
||
|
[ So, in summary, that's ESC {SP-/}* {0-~} ]
|
||
|
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Section: *** nF ***
|
||
|
Sequences: ESC {SP-/} {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC SP {0-~}
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ACS
|
||
|
Description: Announce code structure
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC SP 6
|
||
|
Mnemonic: S8C1R (also DECAC1)
|
||
|
Description: C1 receive disabled
|
||
|
|
||
|
The printer receives 7-bit data and C1 control characters (as 7-bit ESC
|
||
|
Fe sequences).
|
||
|
|
||
|
This description doesn't say what the printer does when it receives an
|
||
|
8-bit C1 control character in DECTC1 (S7C1R) mode. The LA100 reference
|
||
|
says that it just truncates the 8th bit of all C1 control characters
|
||
|
received. Ouch!
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Paul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail
|
||
|
<384A6F50.3349DE09@rdel.co.uk>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC SP 7
|
||
|
Mnemonic: S7C1R (also DECTC1)
|
||
|
Description: C1 receive enabled
|
||
|
|
||
|
The printer receives 8-bit data and C1 control characters (as 7-bit ESC
|
||
|
Fe sequences or single 8-bit bytes).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Paul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail
|
||
|
<384A6F50.3349DE09@rdel.co.uk>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC SP F
|
||
|
Mnemonic: S7C1T
|
||
|
Description: 7-bit C1 controls
|
||
|
|
||
|
The VT220 command ESC SP F (called S7C1T in the DEC documentation) tells
|
||
|
the terminal to transmit the 7 bit equivalents for the 8 bit C1 codes to
|
||
|
the host, both for command responses (like the response to CSI c), and
|
||
|
for function keys which return C1 codes.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_terminals_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: Standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC SP G
|
||
|
Mnemonic: S8C1T
|
||
|
Description: 8-bit C1 controls
|
||
|
|
||
|
Likewise, ESC SP G (S8C1T) tells the terminal to transmit 8 bit C1 codes
|
||
|
if the terminal has an 8 bit data path to the host. (The command has no
|
||
|
effect if the host port is set to 7 bit mode.)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_terminals_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: Standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ! {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CZD
|
||
|
Description: C0-designate
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ! @
|
||
|
Description: C0-designate ECMA-6 IRV C0 set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-6 6th Ed. 9.2
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC " {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Mnemonic: C1D
|
||
|
Description: C1-designate
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Section: *** 3F: Single control functions ***
|
||
|
Sequences: ESC # {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC # {SP-/} 0
|
||
|
Description: ignoring extensions is OK
|
||
|
|
||
|
Part of the X11 COMPOUND_TEXT encoding, this sequence indicates
|
||
|
that the string that follows contains extensions beyond version 1,
|
||
|
but that ignoring those extensions is acceptable. The intermediate
|
||
|
character is in the range 02/00 to 02/15 and indicates the version
|
||
|
number minus one of the specification being used.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
|
||
|
Status: X11 private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC # {SP-/} 1
|
||
|
Description: ignoring extensions is not OK
|
||
|
|
||
|
Part of the X11 COMPOUND_TEXT encoding, this sequence indicates
|
||
|
that the string that follows contains extensions beyond version 1,
|
||
|
and that ignoring those extensions is unacceptable and would lose
|
||
|
mandatory information. The intermediate character is in the range
|
||
|
02/00 to 02/15 and indicates the version number minus one of the
|
||
|
specification being used.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
|
||
|
Status: X11 private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC # 3
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECDHL
|
||
|
Description: Double-width, double-height line (top half)
|
||
|
|
||
|
These sequences cause the line containing the cursor to become the top
|
||
|
or bottom half of a double-height, double width line. The sequences
|
||
|
should be used in pairs on adjacent lines with each line containing the
|
||
|
same character string. If the line was single width single height, all
|
||
|
characters to the right of the center of the screen will be lost. The
|
||
|
cursor remains over the same character position, unless it would be to
|
||
|
the right of the right margin, in which case it is moved to the right
|
||
|
margin.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC # 4
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECDHL
|
||
|
Description: Double-width, double-height line (bottom half)
|
||
|
|
||
|
These sequences cause the line containing the cursor to become the top
|
||
|
or bottom half of a double-height, double width line. The sequences
|
||
|
should be used in pairs on adjacent lines with each line containing the
|
||
|
same character string. If the line was single width single height, all
|
||
|
characters to the right of the center of the screen will be lost. The
|
||
|
cursor remains over the same character position, unless it would be to
|
||
|
the right of the right margin, in which case it is moved to the right
|
||
|
margin.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC # 5
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSWL
|
||
|
Description: Single-width, single-height line
|
||
|
|
||
|
This causes the line which contains the cursor to become single-width,
|
||
|
single-height. The cursor remains on the same character position.
|
||
|
This is the default condition for all new lines on the screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC # 6
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECDWL
|
||
|
Description: Double-width, single-height line
|
||
|
|
||
|
This causes the line that contains the cursor to become double-width
|
||
|
single height. If the line was single width, all characters ro the
|
||
|
right of the center of the screen will be lost. The cursor remains
|
||
|
over the same character position, unless it would be to the right of
|
||
|
the right margin, in which case it is moved to the right margin.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC # 7
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECHCP
|
||
|
Description: Hardcopy
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC # 8
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECALN
|
||
|
Description: Screen alignment display
|
||
|
|
||
|
This command causes the VT100 to fill its screen with uppercase Es for
|
||
|
screen focus and alignment.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC # 9
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECFPP
|
||
|
Description: Perform pending motion
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE90
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LQP02
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Section: *** 4F: Designation of multibyte graphic character sets ***
|
||
|
Sequences: ESC $ {SP-/} {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC $ ( {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate multibyte 94-set
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC $ ) {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate multibyte 94-set
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC $ * {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Description: G2-designate multibyte 94-set
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC $ + {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Description: G3-designate multibyte 94-set
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC $ - {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate multibyte 96-set
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC $ . {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Description: G2-designate multibyte 96-set
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC $ / {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Description: G3-designate multibyte 96-set
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DOCS
|
||
|
Description: Designate other coding system
|
||
|
|
||
|
15.4.1 Purpose
|
||
|
|
||
|
A code-identification function is provided to designate and invoke an
|
||
|
identified coding system different from that of this Standard, not
|
||
|
necessarily a character code. It provides a means for switching
|
||
|
between coding systems according to this Standard and other coding
|
||
|
systems when it is not performed at an outer level (e.g. 15.3).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Each such other coding system is registered in the ISO International
|
||
|
Register of Coded Character Sets (see annex B), together with a Final
|
||
|
Byte (and where necessary one or more associated Intermediate bytes)
|
||
|
to identify it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
This function is also recommended for use by such other coding systems
|
||
|
for returning to the coding system of this Standard, by the use of a
|
||
|
reserved Final Byte which identifies it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE 56
|
||
|
Other standards specify alternative methods for achieving an effect
|
||
|
similar to that of DOCS, e.g. those based on the upper layers defined
|
||
|
in ISO 7498 - Open Systems Interconnection, Basic Reference Model.
|
||
|
|
||
|
15.4.2 Specification
|
||
|
|
||
|
Name: DESIGNATE OTHER CODING SYSTEM Acronym: DOCS
|
||
|
Coded representation: ESC 02/05 F or ESC 02/05 I F
|
||
|
|
||
|
DOCS shall designate and invoke an identified coding system. In the
|
||
|
coded representation of DOCS the F byte (and any associated I bytes)
|
||
|
shall identify the coding system.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DOCS with Final Byte 04/00, without I byte, shall designate the coding
|
||
|
system of this Standard. It is intended for use by other coding
|
||
|
systems for returning to this coding system. It shall restore the
|
||
|
state of the coding system to that at the time of invocation of the
|
||
|
other coding system, that is the state established by announcer
|
||
|
functions, and the designation and invocation state of graphic
|
||
|
character and control character sets. Whether or not other states,
|
||
|
e.g. the active position, are restored is outside the scope of this
|
||
|
Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DOCS with I byte 02/15 shall mean that the other coding system does
|
||
|
not use DOCS (F = 04/00), coded as specified here, to return (it may
|
||
|
have an alternate means to return or none at all). It shall also mean
|
||
|
that after such a return (if any) the previous state of this coding
|
||
|
system (i.e. announcements, designations, and invocations) is
|
||
|
undefined.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DOCS with any other I byte, or with no I byte, shall mean that the
|
||
|
other coding system uses DOCS (F = 04/00) to return.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-35 6th Ed. 15.4
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Description: switch to a coding system which doesn't support DOCS
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-35 6th Ed. 15.4.2
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / 0 length charset STX
|
||
|
Description: switch to named variable-length encoding
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is part of the X11 COMPOUND_TEXT format, and is used to escape
|
||
|
to a character encoding not directly supported by that standard.
|
||
|
This version is for encodings with a variable number of octets per
|
||
|
character.
|
||
|
|
||
|
"length" consists of two octets, M and L, that between them define
|
||
|
the number of octets of data that follow to be ((M-128)*128) + (L-128).
|
||
|
The top bits of M and L are always set. "charset" is a
|
||
|
character set name from the X Consortium CharSet registry. STX is
|
||
|
followed by octets encoded in that character set. "length" includes
|
||
|
the length of the charset name and the STX.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
|
||
|
Status: X11 private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / 1 length charset STX
|
||
|
Description: switch to named single-byte encoding
|
||
|
|
||
|
The same as ESC % / 0, but with one octet per character.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
|
||
|
Status: X11 private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / 2 length charset STX
|
||
|
Description: switch to named double-byte encoding
|
||
|
|
||
|
The same as ESC % / 0, but with two octets per character.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
|
||
|
Status: X11 private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / 3 length charset STX
|
||
|
Description: switch to named triple-byte encoding
|
||
|
|
||
|
The same as ESC % / 0, but with three octets per character.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
|
||
|
Status: X11 private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / 4 length charset STX
|
||
|
Description: switch to named quadruple-byte encoding
|
||
|
|
||
|
The same as ESC % / 0, but with four octets per character.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
|
||
|
Status: X11 private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / {5-?} length
|
||
|
Description: begin extended segment
|
||
|
|
||
|
These sequences begin an as-yet undefined kind of extended segment
|
||
|
in the X11 COMPOUND_TEXT encoding. The "length" is encoded as
|
||
|
described for ESC % / 0; the rest is undefined.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
|
||
|
Status: X11 private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / @
|
||
|
Description: switch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-2, Level 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / A
|
||
|
Description: switch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-4, Level 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / B
|
||
|
Description: Switch to Virtual Terminal service Transparent Set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / C
|
||
|
Description: switch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-2, Level 2
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / D
|
||
|
Description: switch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-4, Level 2
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / E
|
||
|
Description: switch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-2, Level 3
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / F
|
||
|
Description: switch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-4, Level 3
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / G
|
||
|
Description: switch to UTF-8 Level 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / H
|
||
|
Description: switch to UTF-8 Level 2
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / I
|
||
|
Description: switch to UTF-8 Level 3
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / J
|
||
|
Description: switch to UTF-16 Level 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / K
|
||
|
Description: switch to UTF-16 Level 2
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % / L
|
||
|
Description: switch to UTF-16 Level 3
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % 8
|
||
|
Description: switch to UTF-8
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: Linux private; obsolete
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % @
|
||
|
Description: return to ECMA-35 coding system
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-35 6th Ed. 15.4.2
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % A
|
||
|
Description: switch to CSA T 500-1983
|
||
|
|
||
|
Syntax of the North American Videotex/Teletex Presentation Level
|
||
|
Protocol (NAPLPS), CSA T 500-1983
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % B
|
||
|
Description: switch to UCS Transformation Format One (UTF-1)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % C
|
||
|
Description: switch to Data Syntax I of CCITT Rec.T.101
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % D
|
||
|
Description: switch to Data Syntax II of CCITT Rec.T.101
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % E
|
||
|
Description: switch to Photo-Videotex Data Syntax of CCITT Rec. T.101
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % F
|
||
|
Description: switch to Audio Data Syntax of CCITT Rec. T.101
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % G
|
||
|
Description: switch to UTF-8
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC % H
|
||
|
Description: switch to VEMMI Data Syntax of ITU-T Rec. T.107
|
||
|
|
||
|
Videotex Enhanced Man Machine Interface (VEMMI) Data Syntax of ITU-T
|
||
|
Rec. T.107
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC & {0-~}
|
||
|
Mnemonic: IRR
|
||
|
Description: Identify revised registration
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ' {0-~}
|
||
|
Description: Reserved for future standardisation
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Mnemonic: GZD4
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate 94-set
|
||
|
|
||
|
[ NB: All character sets listed here are valid for other G?D4 sequnces too. ]
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( ! @
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate CCITT Greek Primary character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name greek-ccitt)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( ! A
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Cuban character set (NC 99-10:81)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name NC_NC00-10:81)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( ! B
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate ISO 646 invariant character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( ! C
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Irish Gaelic character set (I.S. 433:1996)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( ! D
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Turkmen character set (Turkmen Standard TDS 565)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( ! E
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate ANSEL character set (ANSI/NISO Z39.47)
|
||
|
|
||
|
The ANSEL standard is used in bibliographic work. It addresses special
|
||
|
characters in languages using the Latin alphabet as well as combining
|
||
|
marks (diacritics) required for romanization and transliteration. In
|
||
|
ANSEL, non-spacing characters precede the character that they modify.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The MARC 21 Extended Latin character set (published by the Library of
|
||
|
Congress) is synchronized with ANSEL.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( ! F
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Turkmen 8-bit character set (TDS 616-2003)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( " 1
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Digital Symbol character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE47
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LA210
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( 0
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate VT100 line-drawing set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ???
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( 1
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate alternate character ROM (standard)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ???
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( 2
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate alternate character ROM (graphics)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ???
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( 3
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate HP Roman 8, upper 128 chars
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: pcvt EscapeSequences
|
||
|
Status: HP private?
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( 4
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Dutch character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( 5
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Finnish character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( 6
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Norwegian/Danish character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( 7
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Swedish character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: pcvt EscapeSequences
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( 8
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate APL character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( 9
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate French Canadian character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( <
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate DEC supplemental character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT200
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( =
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Swiss character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( >
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate DEC Technical character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: pcvt EscpaeSequences
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( @
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate ISO-646 IRV
|
||
|
|
||
|
This differs from ASCII in having a currency sign in place of the dollar.
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_646.irv:1983)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( A
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate GB character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is the ECMA-6 IRV (ASCII), with hash turned into sterling.
|
||
|
(IANA name BS_4730)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( B
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate ECMA-6 IRV
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ANSI_X3.4-1968)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-6 6th Ed. 9.2
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( C
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate NATS main Finnish/Swedish character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name NATS-SEFI)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( D
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate NATS additional Finnish/Swedish graphic set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name NATS-SEFI-ADD)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( E
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate NATS main Norwegian/Danish character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name NATS-DANO)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( F
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate NATS additional Norwegian/Danish character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name NATS-DANO-ADD)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( G
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Swedish basic character set (SEN 85 02 00 Annex B)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name SEN_850200_B)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( H
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Swedish name-writing set (SEN 85 02 00 Annex C)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name SEN_85020_C)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( I
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Katakana character set (JIS C 6220 - 1969)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name JIS_C6220-1969-jp)
|
||
|
This character set expects to be in G1
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( J
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Roman character set (JIS C 6220 - 1969)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name JIS_C6220-1969-ro)
|
||
|
This character set expects to be in G0
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( K
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate German character set (DIN 66003)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name DIN_66003)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( K
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate user-defined character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: Linux private; clashes with ECMA-35
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( L
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Portuguese character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name PT)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( M
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate African character set (ISO 6438)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( N
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate basic Cyrillic character set (ISO 5427)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_5427)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( O
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate bibliographic extension character set (DIN 31624)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( P
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate bibliographic extension character set (ISO 5426:1980)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( Q
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate cyrillic bibliographic extension set (ISO 5427:1981)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_5427:1981)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( Q
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate French Canadian character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
|
||
|
Status: DEC private?; clashes with ECMA-35
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( R
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate French character set (NF Z 62-010 (1973))
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name NF_Z_62-010_(1973))
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( S
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Greek bibliographic character set (ISO 5428:1980)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_5428:1980)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( T
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Chinese latin character set (GB 1988 80)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name GB_1988-80)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( U
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Latin-Greek character set (Honeywell-Bull)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name Latin-greek1)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( U
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate PC console character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: Linux private; clashes with ECMA-35
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( V
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate UK Videotex/Teletext character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name BS_viewdata)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( W
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate ISO 646 subset for INIS
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name INIS)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( X
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Greek bibliographic character set (ISO 5428)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( Y
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Italian character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name IT)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( Z
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Spanish character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ES)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( [
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Greek character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name greek7-old)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( \
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Latin/Greek character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name latin-greek)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( ]
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate INIS non-standard extension character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name INIS-8)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( ^
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate INIS Cyrillic extension character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name INIS-cyrillic)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( _
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate CODAR-U Arabic character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( `
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Norwegian/Danish character set (NS 4551)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name NS_4551-1)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( a
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Norwegian character set (NS 4551 version 2)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name NS_4551-2)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( b
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate supplementary Videotex character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name videotex-suppl)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( c
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Videotex mosaic character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( d
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate seccond Videotex mosaic character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( e
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate APL character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( f
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate French character set (NF Z 62-010 (1982))
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name NF_Z_60-010)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( g
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Portuguese character set (IBM)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name PT2)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( h
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Spanish character set (IBM)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ES2)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( i
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Hungarian character set (MSZ 7795/3)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name MSZ_7795.3)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( j
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Greek character set (ELOT)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name greek7)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( k
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Arabic character set (ASMO 449, ISO 9036)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ASMO_449)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( l
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Latin supplementary character set (ISO 6937/2)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name iso-ir-90)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( m
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Japanese OCR-A character set (JIS C 6229-1984)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-a)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( n
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Japanese OCR-B character set (JIS C 6229-1984)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-b)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( o
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Japanese addition OCR-B set (JIS C 6229-1984)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-b-add)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( p
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Japanese hand-printed OCR set (JIS C 6229-1984)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-hand)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( q
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Japanese hand-printed OCR additional set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-hand-add)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( r
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Katakana hand-printed OCR set (JIS C 6229-1984)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-kana)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( s
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate E13B character set (ISO 2033-1983)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_2033-1983)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( t
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate supplemetary Teletext character set (ANSI X3.110)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ANSI_X3.110-1983)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( u
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Teletext character set (CCITT T.61)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name T.61-7bit)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( v
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Teletext supplementary character set (CCITT T.61)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name T.61-8bit)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( w
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Canadian character set 1 (CSA Z243.4 - 1985)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name CSA_Z243.4-1985-1)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( x
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Canadian character set 2 (CSA Z243.4 - 1985)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name (CSA_Z243.4-1985-2)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( y
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate CCITT T.101 Data Syntax I mosaic set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(no IANA name)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( z
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Serbocroatian/Slovenian character set (JUS I.B1.002)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name JUS_I.B1.002)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( {
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Serbocroatian Cyrillic character set (JUS I.B1.003)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANAN name JUS_I.B1.003-serb)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( |
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate CCITT T.101 Data Syntax III
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name T.101-G2)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( }
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Macedonian Cyrillic charcter set (JUS I.B1.004)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name JUS_I.B1.003-mac)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( ~
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate empty character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
The Final Byte 07/14 shall be reserved to identify the empty set of
|
||
|
each type, i.e. the set that does not contain any character. If an
|
||
|
empty set is designated the bit combinations corresponding to the code
|
||
|
table positions of the set shall not be used, i.e. the (non-existent)
|
||
|
characters shall not be invoked.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-35 6th Ed. 14.1
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( % 5
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Digtal Supplemental Graphics set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( % 6
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Portuguese character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ( % =
|
||
|
Description: G0-designate Hebrew character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ) {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Mnemonic: G1D4
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate 94-set
|
||
|
|
||
|
See GZD4 for character sets
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC * {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Mnemonic: G2D4
|
||
|
Description: G2-designated 94-set
|
||
|
|
||
|
See GZD4 for character sets
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC + {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Mnemonic: G3D4
|
||
|
Description: G3-designate 94-set
|
||
|
|
||
|
See GZD4 for character sets
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC , {0-~}
|
||
|
Description: reserved for future standardisation
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Mnemonic: G1D6
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate 96-set
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - @
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Cyrillic set (ECMA-113, 1st ed.)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ECMA-cyrillic)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - A
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-1 character set (ISO 8859-1:1987)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_8859-1:1987)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - B
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-2 character set (ISO 8859-2:1987)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_8859-2:1987)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - C
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-3 character set (ISO 8859-3:1988)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_8859-3:1988)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - D
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-4 character set (ISO 8859-4:1988)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_8859-4:1988)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - E
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate Supplementary Graphic Set (CSA Z243.4-1985)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name CSA_Z243.4-1985-gr)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - F
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Greek set (ISO 8859-7:1987)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_8859-7:1987)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - G
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Arabic set (ISO 8859-6:1987)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_8859-6:1987)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - H
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Hebrew set (ISO 8859-8:1988)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_8859-8:1988)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - I
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Czechoslovak set (CSN 369103)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name CSN_369103)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - J
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate Latin supplementary set (ISO 6937-2:1983)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_6937-2-add)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - K
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate technical character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name IEC_P27-1)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - L
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Cyrillic set (ISO 8859-5:1988)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_8859-5:1988)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - M
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-5 character set (ISO 8859-9:1989)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_8859-9:1989)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - N
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate ISO 6937-2:1983 residual set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_6937-2-add)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - O
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate basic Cyrillic character set (GOST 19768-74)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name GOST_19768-74)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - P
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate Latin-1/2/5 supplemental set
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_8859-supp)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - Q
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate basic box-drawing set (ISO/IEC 10367)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO_10367-box)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - R
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate ISO/IEC 6937:1992 supplementary set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - S
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate CCITT Hebrew supplementary set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - T
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate Thai character set (TIS 620-2533 (1990))
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - U
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate Arabic/French/German set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - V
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-6 character set (ISO 8859-10:1992)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO-8859-10)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - X
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate Sami supplementary set (for use with Latin-6)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name latin-lap)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - Y
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate Baltic rim supplementary set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - Z
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH half of VISCII-2 (TCVN 5712:1993)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name VISCII)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - [
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate IEC technical character set 1 (IEC P1289)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - \
|
||
|
Description: G1-desgnate RH part of Latin-1 Welsh variant
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - ]
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-1 Sami variant
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Dequence: ESC - ^
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Hebrew set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - _
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Celtic set (ISO 8859-14:1998)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(IANA name ISO-8859-14)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - `
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate Uralic supplementary Cyrillic set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - a
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate Volgaic supplementary Cyrillic set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - b
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-9 character set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - c
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-1 set with Euro sign
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - d
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-4 set with Euro sign
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - e
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-7 set with Euro sign
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - f
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Romanian character set (SR 14111:1998)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - g
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate Ogham character set (IS 434:1997)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - i
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate Sami supplementary set no 2
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - j
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Greek set (ISO/IEC 8859-7:2003)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - k
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Hebrew set (SI1311:2002)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC - }
|
||
|
Description: G1-designate supplementary mosaic set (CCITT T.101)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC . {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Mnemonic: G2D6
|
||
|
Description: G2-designate 96-set
|
||
|
|
||
|
See G1D6 for character sets
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC / {SP-/}* {0-~}
|
||
|
Mnemonic: G3D6
|
||
|
Description: G3-designate 96-set
|
||
|
|
||
|
See G1D6 for character sets
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Section: *** Fp: private control functions ***
|
||
|
Sequences: ESC {0-?}
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC 1
|
||
|
Description: Graphics proc. option on
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC 1
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECHTS
|
||
|
Description: Horizontal tab set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets horizontal tab stop at active column
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE10
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; DECwriter, LA100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC 2
|
||
|
Description: Graphics proc. option off
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC 2
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECCAHT
|
||
|
Description: Clear all horizontal tabs
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; DECwriter
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC 3
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECVTS
|
||
|
Description: Vertical tab set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets vertical tab stop at active line
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE11
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; printers
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC 4
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECCAVT
|
||
|
Description: Clear all vertical tabs
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; DECwriter
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC 5
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECXMIT
|
||
|
Description: Transmit character at cursor
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC 6
|
||
|
Description: Backward index
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECBI
|
||
|
|
||
|
/*
|
||
|
* VT400 & up.
|
||
|
* DECBI - Back Index
|
||
|
* This control function moves the cursor backward one column. If the cursor
|
||
|
* is at the left margin, then all screen data within the margin moves one
|
||
|
* column to the right. The column that shifted past the right margin is lost.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Format: ESC 6
|
||
|
* Description:
|
||
|
* DECBI adds a new column at the left margin with no visual attributes. DECBI
|
||
|
* is not affected by the margins. If the cursor is at the left border of the
|
||
|
* page when the terminal received DECBI, then the terminal ignores DECBI.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC 7
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSC
|
||
|
Description: Save cursor
|
||
|
|
||
|
Saves in terminal memory the:
|
||
|
cursor position
|
||
|
graphic rendition
|
||
|
character set shift state
|
||
|
state of wrap flag
|
||
|
state of origin mode
|
||
|
state of selective erase
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC 8
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRC
|
||
|
Description: Restore Cursor
|
||
|
|
||
|
Restores the states described for (DECSC) above. If none of these
|
||
|
characteristics were saved: the cursor moves to home position, origin
|
||
|
mode is reset, no character attributes are assigned, and the default
|
||
|
character set mapping is established.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC 9
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECFI
|
||
|
Description: Forward index
|
||
|
|
||
|
/*
|
||
|
* VT400 & up.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* DECFI - Forward Index
|
||
|
* This control function moves the column forward one column. If the cursor is
|
||
|
* at the right margin, then all screen data within the margins moves one
|
||
|
* column to the left. The column shifted past the left margin is lost.
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Format: ESC 9
|
||
|
* Description:
|
||
|
* DECFI adds a new column at the right margin with no visual attributes.
|
||
|
* DECFI is not affected by the margins. If the cursor is at the right border
|
||
|
* of the page when the terminal receives DECFI, then the terminal ignores
|
||
|
* DECFI.
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC =
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECKPAM
|
||
|
Description: Keypad application mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
The auxiliary keypad keys will transmit control sequences.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC >
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECKPNM
|
||
|
Description: Keypad numeric mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
The auxiliary keypad keys will send ASCII codes corresponding to the
|
||
|
characters engraved on their keys.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC Z
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECID
|
||
|
Description: Identify terminal
|
||
|
|
||
|
This sequence causes the same response as the DA sequence. This
|
||
|
sequence will not be supported in future models.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Section: *** Fs: Standardized single control functions ***
|
||
|
Sequences: ESC ` to ESC ~
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC `
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DMI
|
||
|
Description: Disable manual input
|
||
|
|
||
|
DMI causes the manual input facilities of a device to be disabled.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.34
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC a
|
||
|
Mnemonic: INT
|
||
|
Description: Interrupt
|
||
|
|
||
|
INT is used to indicate to the receiving device that the current
|
||
|
process is to be interrupted and an agreed procedure is to be
|
||
|
initiated. This control function is applicable to either direction of
|
||
|
transmission.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.68
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC b
|
||
|
Mnemonic: EMI
|
||
|
Description: Enable manual input
|
||
|
|
||
|
EMI is used to enable the manual input facilities of a device.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.43
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC c
|
||
|
Mnemonic: RIS
|
||
|
Description: Reset to initial state
|
||
|
|
||
|
RIS causes a device to be reset to its initial state, i.e. the state
|
||
|
it has after it is made operational. This may imply, if applicable:
|
||
|
clear tabulation stops, remove qualified areas, reset graphic
|
||
|
rendition, put all character positions into the erased state, move the
|
||
|
active presentation position to the first position of the first line
|
||
|
in the presentation component, move the active data position to the
|
||
|
first character position of the first line in the data component, set
|
||
|
the modes into the reset state, etc.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.105
|
||
|
|
||
|
(DEC) replaces all terminal set-up parameters with NVR values or
|
||
|
power-up default values if NVR values do not exist.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
"VT220 Programmer Pocket Guide" EK-VT220-HR-001, page 33
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC d
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CMD
|
||
|
Description: Coding method delimiter
|
||
|
|
||
|
CMD is used as the delimiter of a string of data coded according to
|
||
|
Standard ECMA-35 and to switch to a general level of control.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of CMD is not mandatory if the higher level protocol defines
|
||
|
means of delimiting the string, for instance, by specifying the length
|
||
|
of the string.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.11
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC d
|
||
|
Description: Set colour table
|
||
|
|
||
|
ESC d Only available if PCVT_SETCOLOR was defined when
|
||
|
compiling the kernel, allows to set custom color table
|
||
|
for more info, see pcvt_out.c ...
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: pcvt EscapeSequences
|
||
|
Status: pcvt private; clashes with ECMA-48 CMD
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC l
|
||
|
Mnemonic: LMA
|
||
|
Description: Lock memory above
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is an alternative way to set the scrolling region, and is not
|
||
|
valid in backwards compatibility mode. This sequence sets the top
|
||
|
margin to the current line, and the bottom margin extends to the last
|
||
|
row of the screen. This has the effect of locking the rows above the
|
||
|
current line. This sequence will move the cursor to the beginning of
|
||
|
the new region.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: HP private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC m
|
||
|
Mnemonic: USR
|
||
|
Description: Unlock scrolling region
|
||
|
|
||
|
This sequence can be used to remove the scrolling region. The cursor
|
||
|
is not moved from its current position. The top, bottom, left and
|
||
|
right margins are set to cover the entire screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: HP private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC n
|
||
|
Mnemonic: LS2
|
||
|
Description: Locking-shift two
|
||
|
|
||
|
LS2 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
|
||
|
bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of LS2 is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.78
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC o
|
||
|
Mnemonic: LS3
|
||
|
Description: Locking-shift three
|
||
|
|
||
|
LS3 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
|
||
|
bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of LS3 is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.80
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC { A Ps CR
|
||
|
Description: Append to a file
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps is the file name
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/villanova-vt100-esc-codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: unknown private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC { R Ps CR
|
||
|
Descripton: Receive a file
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps is the file name
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/villanova-vt100-esc-codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: unknown private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC { S
|
||
|
Description: Save collected text
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/villanova-vt100-esc-codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: unknown private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC { T Ps CR
|
||
|
Description: Transmit a file
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps is the file name
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/villanova-vt100-esc-codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: unknown private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC |
|
||
|
Mnemonic: LS3R
|
||
|
Description: Locking-shift three right
|
||
|
|
||
|
LS3R is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of
|
||
|
the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of LS3R is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.81
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC }
|
||
|
Mnemonic: LS2R
|
||
|
Description: Locking-shift two right
|
||
|
|
||
|
LS2R is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of
|
||
|
the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of LS2R is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.79
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESC ~
|
||
|
Mnemonic: LS1R
|
||
|
Description: Locking-shift one right
|
||
|
|
||
|
LS1R is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of
|
||
|
the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of LS1R is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.77
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Section: *** C0 controls (continued) ***
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: IS4 (^\)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: IS4
|
||
|
Description: Information separator four (FS - file separator)
|
||
|
|
||
|
IS4 is used to separate and qualify data logically; its specific
|
||
|
meaning has to be defined for each application. If this control
|
||
|
function is used in hierarchical order, it may delimit a data item
|
||
|
called a file, see 8.2.10.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.72
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: IS3 (^])
|
||
|
Mnemonic: IS3
|
||
|
Description: Information separator three (GS - group separator)
|
||
|
|
||
|
IS3 is used to separate and qualify data logically; its specific
|
||
|
meaning has to be defined for each application. If this control
|
||
|
function is used in hierarchical order, it may delimit a data item
|
||
|
called a group, see 8.2.10.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.71
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: IS2 (^^)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: IS2
|
||
|
Description: Information separator two (RS - record separator)
|
||
|
|
||
|
IS2 is used to separate and qualify data logically; its specific
|
||
|
meaning has to be defined for each application. If this control
|
||
|
function is used in hierarchical order, it may delimit a data item
|
||
|
called a record, see 8.2.10.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.70
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: IS1 (^_)
|
||
|
Mnemonic: IS1
|
||
|
Description: Information separator one (US - unit separator)
|
||
|
|
||
|
IS1 is used to separate and qualify data logically; its specific
|
||
|
meaning has to be defined for each application. If this control
|
||
|
function is used in hierarchical order, it may delimit a data item
|
||
|
called a unit, see 8.2.10.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.69
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DEL
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DEL
|
||
|
Description: Delete
|
||
|
|
||
|
The character DELETE (bit combination 07/15, see ISO/IEC 646, clause
|
||
|
6.5), not being a control function in the strict sense, has been
|
||
|
removed from the body of the Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DEL was originally used to erase or obliterate an erroneous or
|
||
|
unwanted character in punched tape. DEL characters may be inserted
|
||
|
into, or removed from, a CC-data-element without affecting its
|
||
|
information content, but such action may affect the information layout
|
||
|
and/or the control of equipment.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.8.1
|
||
|
Status: standard; obsolete
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Section: *** C1 controls ***
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: BPH or ESC B
|
||
|
Mnemonic: BPH
|
||
|
Description: Break permitted here
|
||
|
|
||
|
BPH is used to indicate a point where a line break may occur when text
|
||
|
is formatted. BPH may occur between two graphic characters, either or
|
||
|
both of which may be SPACE.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.4
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: NBH or ESC C
|
||
|
Mnemonic: NBH
|
||
|
Description: No break here
|
||
|
|
||
|
NBH is used to indicate a point where a line break shall not occur
|
||
|
when text is formatted. NBH may occur between two graphic characters
|
||
|
either or both of which may be SPACE.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.85
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: IND or ESC D
|
||
|
Mnemonic: IND
|
||
|
Description: Index
|
||
|
|
||
|
The control function INDEX (IND) which was coded as an element of the
|
||
|
C1 set (08/04) and the use of which was already declared deprecated in
|
||
|
the fourth Edition of this Standard has now been removed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.8.2
|
||
|
Status: standard; obsolete
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: NEL or ESC E
|
||
|
Mnemonic: NEL
|
||
|
Description: Next line
|
||
|
|
||
|
The effect of NEL depends on the setting of the DEVICE COMPONENT
|
||
|
SELECT MODE (DCSM) and on the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT
|
||
|
MOVEMENT DIRECTION (SIMD).
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION and
|
||
|
with a parameter value of SIMD equal to 0, NEL causes the active
|
||
|
presentation position to be moved to the line home position of the
|
||
|
following line in the presentation component. The line home position
|
||
|
is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
|
||
|
|
||
|
With a parameter value of SIMD equal to 1, NEL causes the active
|
||
|
presentation position to be moved to the line limit position of the
|
||
|
following line in the presentation component. The line limit position
|
||
|
is established by the parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL).
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA and with a
|
||
|
parameter value of SIMD equal to 0, NEL causes the active data
|
||
|
position to be moved to the line home position of the following line
|
||
|
in the data component. The line home position is established by the
|
||
|
parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
|
||
|
|
||
|
With a parameter value of SIMD equal to 1, NEL causes the active data
|
||
|
position to be moved to the line limit position of the following line
|
||
|
in the data component. The line limit position is established by the
|
||
|
parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.86
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: SSA or ESC F
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SSA
|
||
|
Description: Start of selected area
|
||
|
|
||
|
SSA is used to indicate that the active presentation position is the
|
||
|
first of a string of character positions in the presentation
|
||
|
component, the contents of which are eligible to be transmitted in the
|
||
|
form of a data stream or transferred to an auxiliary input/output
|
||
|
device.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The end of this string is indicated by END OF SELECTED AREA (ESA). The
|
||
|
string of characters actually transmitted or transferred depends on
|
||
|
the setting of the GUARDED AREA TRANSFER MODE (GATM) and on any
|
||
|
guarded areas established by DEFINE AREA QUALIFICATION (DAQ), or by
|
||
|
START OF GUARDED AREA (SPA) and END OF GUARDED AREA (EPA).
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
|
||
|
should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.138
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ESA or ESC G
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ESA
|
||
|
Description: End of selected area
|
||
|
|
||
|
ESA is used to indicate that the active presentation position is the
|
||
|
last of a string of character positions in the presentation component,
|
||
|
the contents of which are eligible to be transmitted in the form of a
|
||
|
data stream or transferred to an auxiliary input/output device. The
|
||
|
beginning of this string is indicated by START OF SELECTED AREA (SSA).
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
The control function for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
|
||
|
should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.47
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: HTS or ESC H
|
||
|
Mnemonic: HTS
|
||
|
Description: Character tabulation set
|
||
|
|
||
|
HTS causes a character tabulation stop to be set at the active
|
||
|
presentation position in the presentation component.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The number of lines affected depends on the setting of the TABULATION
|
||
|
STOP MODE (TSM).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.62
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: HTJ or ESC I
|
||
|
Mnemonic: HTJ
|
||
|
Description: Character tabulation with justification
|
||
|
|
||
|
HTJ causes the contents of the active field (the field in the
|
||
|
presentation component that contains the active presentation position)
|
||
|
to be shifted forward so that it ends at the character position
|
||
|
preceding the following character tabulation stop. The active
|
||
|
presentation position is moved to that following character tabulation
|
||
|
stop. The character positions which precede the beginning of the
|
||
|
shifted string are put into the erased state.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.61
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: VTS or ESC J
|
||
|
Mnemonic: VTS
|
||
|
Description: Line tabulation set
|
||
|
|
||
|
VTS causes a line tabulation stop to be set at the active line (the
|
||
|
line that contains the active presentation position).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.162
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: PLD or ESC K
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PLD
|
||
|
Description: Partial line forward
|
||
|
|
||
|
PLD causes the active presentation position to be moved in the
|
||
|
presentation component to the corresponding position of an imaginary
|
||
|
line with a partial offset in the direction of the line progression.
|
||
|
This offset should be sufficient either to image following characters
|
||
|
as subscripts until the first following occurrence of PARTIAL LINE
|
||
|
BACKWARD (PLU) in the data stream, or, if preceding characters were
|
||
|
imaged as superscripts, to restore imaging of following characters to
|
||
|
the active line (the line that contains the active presentation
|
||
|
position).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Any interactions between PLD and format effectors other than PLU are
|
||
|
not defined by this Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.92
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: PLU or ESC L
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PLU
|
||
|
Description: Partial line backward
|
||
|
|
||
|
PLU causes the active presentation position to be moved in the
|
||
|
presentation component to the corresponding position of an imaginary
|
||
|
line with a partial offset in the direction opposite to that of the
|
||
|
line progression. This offset should be sufficient either to image
|
||
|
following characters as superscripts until the first following
|
||
|
occurrence of PARTIAL LINE FORWARD (PLD) in the data stream, or, if
|
||
|
preceding characters were imaged as subscripts, to restore imaging of
|
||
|
following characters to the active line (the line that contains the
|
||
|
active presentation position).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Any interactions between PLU and format effectors other than PLD are
|
||
|
not defined by this Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.93
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: RI or ESC M
|
||
|
Mnemonic: RI
|
||
|
Description: Reverse line feed
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, RI
|
||
|
causes the active presentation position to be moved in the
|
||
|
presentation component to the corresponding character position of the
|
||
|
preceding line.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, RI causes
|
||
|
the active data position to be moved in the data component to the
|
||
|
corresponding character position of the preceding line.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.104
|
||
|
|
||
|
In earlier versions of ECMA-48, this was known as "Reverse Index".
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Paul Williams <flo@uk.thalesgroup.com> in comp.terminals
|
||
|
<3D19AB54.E35A3B25@uk.thalesgroup.com>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: SS2 or ESC N
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SS2
|
||
|
Description: Single-shift two
|
||
|
|
||
|
SS2 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
|
||
|
bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of SS2 is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.141
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: SS3 or ESC O
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SS3
|
||
|
Description: Single-shift three
|
||
|
|
||
|
SS3 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
|
||
|
bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of SS3 is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.142
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS or ESC P
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DCS
|
||
|
Description: Device control string
|
||
|
|
||
|
DCS is used as the opening delimiter of a control string for device
|
||
|
control use. The command string following may consist of bit
|
||
|
combinations in the range 00/08 to 00/13 and 02/00 to 07/14. The
|
||
|
control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING
|
||
|
TERMINATOR (ST).
|
||
|
|
||
|
The command string represents either one or more commands for the
|
||
|
receiving device, or one or more status reports from the sending
|
||
|
device. The purpose and the format of the command string are specified
|
||
|
by the most recent occurrence of IDENTIFY DEVICE CONTROL STRING
|
||
|
(IDCS), if any, or depend on the sending and/or the receiving device.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.27
|
||
|
|
||
|
For Digital VTxxx terminals we've extended this as follows:
|
||
|
|
||
|
DCS <introducer-sequence> <string-data> ST
|
||
|
|
||
|
The introducer sequence follows exactly the same syntax and
|
||
|
symantics as a control sequence except that CSI is replaced by DCS.
|
||
|
The <string-data> is control string specific.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source:
|
||
|
<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990712 vt420.c
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Ps g data ST
|
||
|
Description: LA100 graphics string
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps =
|
||
|
0, 1, 5 Dot spacing 7.57 mils (132 dpi)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE12
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Ps p Pr ST
|
||
|
Description: ReGIS graphics
|
||
|
|
||
|
DCS p or DCS 0 p
|
||
|
Re-enter ReGIS at the point where it was last exited. Does
|
||
|
not display commands.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DCS 1 p
|
||
|
Enter ReGIS at command level; ReGIS begins a new command.
|
||
|
Does not display commands.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DCS x+2 p, x=0 or 1
|
||
|
Like DCS x p, but displays commands on the screen's bottom
|
||
|
line.
|
||
|
|
||
|
[ Pr is a ReGIS string, which I'm not going to document here just yet. ]
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_regis_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS P1 ; P2 ; P3 q Ps ST
|
||
|
Description: Sixel graphics
|
||
|
|
||
|
P1 is the macro parameter. This parameter indicates the pixel
|
||
|
aspect ratio used by the application or terminal. The pixel
|
||
|
aspect ratio defines the shape of the pixel dots the terminal
|
||
|
uses to draw images. For example, a pixel that is twice as high
|
||
|
as it is wide has an aspect ratio of 2:1.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE: The macro parameter is provided for compatibility with
|
||
|
existing Digital software. New applications should set P1 to 0
|
||
|
and use the set raster attributes control, described later in
|
||
|
this chapter.
|
||
|
|
||
|
P1 Pixel Aspect Ratio
|
||
|
(Vertical:Horizontal)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Omitted 2:1
|
||
|
0 or 1 5:1
|
||
|
2 3:1
|
||
|
3 or 4 2:1
|
||
|
5 or 6 2:1
|
||
|
7,8, or 9 1:1
|
||
|
|
||
|
P2 selects how the terminal draws the background color. You can 3$
|
||
|
use one of three values.
|
||
|
|
||
|
P2 Meaning
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 or 2 Pixel positions specified as 0 are set to the
|
||
|
current background color.
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 Pixel positions specified as 0 remain at their
|
||
|
current color.
|
||
|
|
||
|
P3 is the horizontal grid size parameter. The horizontal grid
|
||
|
size is the horizontal distance between two pixel dots. The
|
||
|
VT300 ignores this parameter because the horizontal grid size is
|
||
|
fixed at 0.0195 cm (0.0075 in).
|
||
|
|
||
|
In the data section:
|
||
|
|
||
|
Characters from ? to ~ encode a column of pixels one wide and six
|
||
|
high. ? is all-zeros, ~ is all-ones and the low-order bit is at the
|
||
|
top.
|
||
|
|
||
|
! Pn encodes a repeat count of the following character
|
||
|
- causes the next band of sixels to start below the current one at the left
|
||
|
margin
|
||
|
$ causes the next band to overlay the current one, starting at the left margin.
|
||
|
# Pn selects palette entry Pn.
|
||
|
# Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 sets palette entry Pn1 to contain the colour
|
||
|
(Pn3, Pn4, Pn5) in the colour space represented by Pn1 (1 = HLS, 2 = RGB).
|
||
|
Anything else is ignored.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/all_about_sixels.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS v data ST
|
||
|
Description: Answerback message entry
|
||
|
|
||
|
Data consists of up to 30 characters coded in hex.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LA100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Ps1 ; Ps2 ... x Pstr ST
|
||
|
Description: DECtalk commands
|
||
|
|
||
|
Synchronize <ESC> P;11x <ESC> \
|
||
|
Load Dictionary <ESC> P0;40z name sub ESC \
|
||
|
Answer Phone <ESC> P;60;10;[number of rings]z <ESC> \
|
||
|
Hang Up Phone <ESC> P;60;11z <ESC> \
|
||
|
Enable Keypad <ESC> P;60;20z <ESC> \
|
||
|
Set Timeout <ESC> P;60;30;[number of seconds]z <ESC> \
|
||
|
Tone Dial <ESC> P;60;40z text <ESC> \
|
||
|
Pulse Dial <ESC> P;60;41z text <ESC> \
|
||
|
On-hook Status (response) <ESC> P;70;0x <ESC> \
|
||
|
Off-hook status (response) <ESC> P;70;1z <ESC> \
|
||
|
Timeout status (response) <ESC> P;70;2z <ESC> \
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppG6-G9
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; DECtalk
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS 0 ; Ps2 ; Ps3 y FntRcrd ; CommentRecord ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECLFF
|
||
|
Description: Load font file
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps2 Meaning
|
||
|
0 Print summary sheet
|
||
|
1 Don't print summary sheet
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps3 Meaning
|
||
|
0 Delete all fonts
|
||
|
1 Replace fonts with same ID
|
||
|
|
||
|
FntRcrd = data for font set
|
||
|
|
||
|
ComentRecord = user supplied text
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE109
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LA100, LN03
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Pfn ; Pcn ; Pe ; Pcms ; Pw ; Pt ; Pcmh ; Pcss {
|
||
|
Dscs Sxbp1 ; Sxbp2 ; ... ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECDLD
|
||
|
Description: Down-line load DRCS characters
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pfn;Pcn;Pe;Pcms;Pw;Pt are parameter characters, separated by
|
||
|
semicolons, that define parameters described in Table 4-9. Valid
|
||
|
values for Pcms, Pw, and Pt are: Pcms = 0, 2, 3 or 4; Pw = 0, 1 or 2;
|
||
|
and Pt = 0 or 1. Invalid combinations are ignored. A font loaded for
|
||
|
80 columns can be used in 132 columns and a font loaded for 132
|
||
|
columns can be used in 80 columns.
|
||
|
|
||
|
{ (7/11) is the final character that signals the end of the parameter
|
||
|
characters and specifies a DECDLD function.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Dscs defines the character set "name" for the soft font, and is used
|
||
|
in the SCS (select character set) escape sequence.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sxbp1;Sxbp2;...;Sxbpn are sixel bit patterns (1 to 94 patterns) for
|
||
|
characters separated by semicolons. Each sixel bit pattern has the
|
||
|
form:
|
||
|
|
||
|
S...S/S...S
|
||
|
|
||
|
where the first S...S represents the upper columns (sixels) of the
|
||
|
DRCS character, the slash (2/5) advances the sixel pattern to the
|
||
|
lower columns of the DRCS character, and the second S...S represents
|
||
|
the lower columns (sixels) of the DRCS (see Figure 4-6).
|
||
|
|
||
|
ST (9/12) is the string terminator. It is an 8-bit control character
|
||
|
that you can also express as ESC \ (1/11 5/12) when coding for a 7-bit
|
||
|
environment.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Table 4-9 DECDLD Parameter Characters
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter Name Description
|
||
|
Pfn Font Number Specifies DRCS font buffer to be loaded. The
|
||
|
VT220 has only one DRCS font
|
||
|
buffer. This parameter has two valid
|
||
|
values: 0 and 1.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pcn Starting
|
||
|
Character
|
||
|
Number
|
||
|
|
||
|
Selects starting character in DRCS font
|
||
|
buffer to be loaded. For example:
|
||
|
Parameter value 1 specifies a column 2/row
|
||
|
1 character, parameter 94 specifies
|
||
|
a column 7/row 14 character (Table 2-1 in
|
||
|
Chapter 2).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pe Erase Control Selects which characters are erased before
|
||
|
loading according to:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 = erase all characters in this DRCS set
|
||
|
1 = erase only the characters that are being
|
||
|
reloaded
|
||
|
2 = erase all characters in all DRCS sets
|
||
|
(this font buffer number and
|
||
|
other font buffer numbers)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pcms Character Matrix
|
||
|
Size Defines the expected limit of the character
|
||
|
matrix size according to:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 = Device default (7 x 10)
|
||
|
1 = (not used)
|
||
|
2 = 5 x 10
|
||
|
3 = 6 x 10
|
||
|
4 = 7 x 10
|
||
|
5 = 5 x Pcmh
|
||
|
6 = 6 x Pcmh
|
||
|
7 = 7 x Pcmh
|
||
|
8 = 8 x Pcmh
|
||
|
9 = 9 x Pcmh
|
||
|
10 = 10 x Pcmh
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pw Width Attribute Specifies the width attribute according to:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 = Device default (80 Columns)
|
||
|
1 = 80 column
|
||
|
2 = 132 column
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pt Text/ Full-Cell Allows software to treat the font as a text
|
||
|
font or a full-cell font according to:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 = Device default (text)
|
||
|
1 = Text
|
||
|
2 = Full-Cell (not used)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Full-Cell fonts can individually address
|
||
|
all pixels in a cell, while text fonts, in
|
||
|
general, may not be able to address all
|
||
|
pixels individually.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pcmh Character Matrix Height
|
||
|
Sets the character matrix size in conjuction
|
||
|
with Pcms. The maximum is device-dependent.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pcss Character-set size
|
||
|
0 = 94 characters 1 = 96 characters
|
||
|
|
||
|
[ The sixels have MSB at the bottom and an offset of 077 octal applied ]
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT200
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS 2000 ; Pterm ; Ptag { Ps ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: WRQCMD
|
||
|
Description: Invoke a reflection command
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: WRQ private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS ... | ... ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECUDK
|
||
|
Description: User-defined keys
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Paul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail
|
||
|
<3844F164.F2242F18@rdel.co.uk>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Ps1 ; Ps2 } IDstring ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECATFF
|
||
|
Description: Assign to font file
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 Meaning
|
||
|
1 Assign by font (default)
|
||
|
2 Assign by font family
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps2 = font number for use with SGR
|
||
|
|
||
|
IDstring = name associated with font number
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE108
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LA100, LN03
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Ps ! q ... ST
|
||
|
Description: Enter GIDIS mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE126
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LCP01
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Ps ~ IDstring ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECDTFF
|
||
|
Description: Delete type family or font file
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 Meaning
|
||
|
0 IDstring is type family
|
||
|
1 IDstring is font
|
||
|
|
||
|
IDstring = 7 letter family name or 16 letter font ID
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE108
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LN03
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Pn ! u Ps ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECAUPSS
|
||
|
Description: Assign user-preferred supplemental set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn = 0 for 94-character, 1 for 96-character (?)
|
||
|
Ps = character set specifier as passed to GZD4 and co. (?)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ! z Ps ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECDMAC
|
||
|
|
||
|
You can define macros that are interpreted as normal input when
|
||
|
emulating the VT420 terminal. Any macro definitions that do not fit
|
||
|
into the memory allotted are ignored. An RIS or DECSR clears all macro
|
||
|
definitions. A soft reset (DECSTR) has no effect.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn1: Macro ID number (0-63). If you give a macro an ID number that
|
||
|
already exists, the old macro definition is deleted and the new one is
|
||
|
used. If <n1> exceeds 63, Reflection ignores this control
|
||
|
function. Everything but the Csi 5i and Csi 4i control functions are
|
||
|
passed to the printer.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn2: Determine how a new macro definition is treated: If Pn2 is 0 or
|
||
|
omitted, an old macro with the same macro ID number is deleted. If
|
||
|
Pn2 is 1, DECDMAC deletes all current macro definitions before
|
||
|
defining this macro. If <n2> is a number that is not 0 or 1, the macro
|
||
|
is ignored.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn3: Select the encoding format for the text of the macro definition:
|
||
|
If Pn3 is 0 or omitted, ASCII text is used in the macro. If Pn3 is
|
||
|
1, hex pairs are used (each pair of characters in the macro is the hex
|
||
|
value for a single ASCII character. If Pn3 is a number that is not 0
|
||
|
or 1, the macro is ignored. The string of text and control functions
|
||
|
to be performed when the macro is invoked. If hex pairs are used, you
|
||
|
can also use a repeat introducer (!) in Ps. The repeat introducer
|
||
|
lets you repeat any hex pair in the definition string any number of
|
||
|
times.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS ... ! | ... ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRPTUI
|
||
|
Description: Report Terminal Unit Information
|
||
|
|
||
|
(to Host)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Paul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail
|
||
|
<3844F164.F2242F18@rdel.co.uk>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Pn ! ~ Ps ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECCKSR
|
||
|
Description: Checksum response
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is sent by the terminal in response to DECRQCRA or DSR ? 63. Ps
|
||
|
is a four-digit hexadecimal checksum. Pn is the identifier given in
|
||
|
the checksum request.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS ... " { ... ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECFSR
|
||
|
Description: Font Status Report
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Paul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail
|
||
|
<3844F164.F2242F18@rdel.co.uk>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS 1 $ p Ps ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRSTS
|
||
|
Description: Restore terminal state
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets terminal state. Ps should be a string returned by DECTSR.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT300
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS 2 $ p Ps ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRSTS
|
||
|
Description: Restore color table
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets the color table. Ps is as specified under DECCTR.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT300
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS $ q Ps ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRQSS
|
||
|
Description: Control function settings request
|
||
|
|
||
|
This sequence is sent by the host to request the terminal to report
|
||
|
the setting of a control function. The control function in question
|
||
|
is specified by Ps, which is the intermediate (if any) and final bytes
|
||
|
of the function's control sequence. The following values of Ps are
|
||
|
supported:
|
||
|
|
||
|
m => SGR
|
||
|
r => DECSTBM
|
||
|
$ | => DECSCPP
|
||
|
$ } => DECSASD
|
||
|
$ ~ => DECSSDT
|
||
|
" p => DECSCL
|
||
|
" q => DECSCA
|
||
|
|
||
|
The terminal responds with DECRPSS. Only one control function may be
|
||
|
queried at a time.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Pn $ r Ps ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRPSS
|
||
|
Description: Control function settings response
|
||
|
|
||
|
This sequence is returned by the terminal in response to DECRQSS.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn is 0 if the request was invalid (e.g. for a function that can't be
|
||
|
reported) or 1 if it was successful.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps is the complete control sequence (minus the leading CSI) necessary
|
||
|
to set the state of the requested control function.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS 1 $ s Ps ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECTSR
|
||
|
Description: Terminal state report
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is sent in response to a DECRQTSR, and contains an opaque
|
||
|
representation of the terminal's state.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT300
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS 2 $ s Ps ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECCTR
|
||
|
Description: Color table report
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is sent by the terminal in response to DECRQTSR. Ps contains the
|
||
|
terminal's colour table. The palette entries are separated by slashes, and
|
||
|
each one containe (semicolon-separated):
|
||
|
|
||
|
Color ???
|
||
|
Colour space (1 => HLS, 2 => RGB)
|
||
|
Components (H;L;S or R;G;B)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Ps $ t Ps ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRSPS
|
||
|
Description: Restore presentation state
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps is 1 to restore cursor information and 2 to restore tab stops. Ps is
|
||
|
in the format returned by DECCIR or DECTABSR respectively.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS 1 $ u Pr ; Pc ; Pp ; Srend ; Satt ; Sflag ; Pgl ; Pgr ; Scss ;
|
||
|
Sdesig ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECCIR
|
||
|
Description: Cursor information report
|
||
|
|
||
|
See DECRQPSR for request.
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Response DCS 1 $ u Pr; Pc; Pp; Srend; Satt; Sflag; Pgl; Pgr; Scss; Sdesig ST
|
||
|
* where Pr is cursor row (counted from origin as 1,1)
|
||
|
* Pc is cursor column
|
||
|
* Pp is 1, video page, a constant for VT320s
|
||
|
* Srend = 40h + 8 (rev video on) + 4 (blinking on)
|
||
|
* + 2 (underline on) + 1 (bold on)
|
||
|
* Satt = 40h + 1 (selective erase on)
|
||
|
* Sflag = 40h + 8 (autowrap pending) + 4 (SS3 pending)
|
||
|
* + 2 (SS2 pending) + 1 (Origin mode on)
|
||
|
* Pgl = char set in GL (0 = G0, 1 = G1, 2 = G2, 3 = G3)
|
||
|
* Pgr = char set in GR (same as for Pgl)
|
||
|
* Scss = 40h + 8 (G3 is 96 char) + 4 (G2 is 96 char)
|
||
|
* + 2 (G1 is 96 char) + 1 (G0 is 96 char)
|
||
|
* Sdesig is string of character idents for sets G0...G3, with
|
||
|
* no separators between set idents.
|
||
|
* If NRCs are active the set idents (all 94 byte types) are:
|
||
|
* British A Italian Y
|
||
|
* Dutch 4 Norwegian/Danish ' (hex 60) or E or 6
|
||
|
* Finnish 5 or C Portuguese %6 or g or L
|
||
|
* French R or f Spanish Z
|
||
|
* French Canadian 9 or Q Swedish 7 or H
|
||
|
* German K Swiss =
|
||
|
* Hebrew %=
|
||
|
* (MS Kermit uses any choice when there are multiple)
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990712 vt420.c
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS 2 $ u Ps ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECTABSR
|
||
|
Description: Tab stop report
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sent by the terminal is response to a DECRQPSR.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps is a slash-separated list of tab stops.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Pc $ w Ky1 / Std1 / Stu1 ; ... ; Kyn / Stnd / Stnu ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECLKD (also DECLBD)
|
||
|
Description: Locator key definition
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pc - Clear parameter
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 (or omitted) Clear all LKDs before loading new values. All button
|
||
|
definition strings are empty (not the default).
|
||
|
1 Clear old definition only for keys that are redefined.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Kyn / Stnd / Stnu - Key selection code n, slash delimeter, and string
|
||
|
parameter n for down and up key transitions.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Kyn is a single ASCII digit, and Std/Stu is a series of ASCII hex
|
||
|
pairs. If Std or Stu is omitted, the corresponding button string will
|
||
|
be empty. Key definition strings are delimited with a semicolon (";").
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT340?
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: DCS Pn . y Ps ST
|
||
|
Description: xwsh device control
|
||
|
|
||
|
Device control string. Ps is a single ansi string (character codes in
|
||
|
the range of octal 040 to 0176 inclusive). The following defines what
|
||
|
the string is used for.
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 Set the window title.
|
||
|
3 Set the icon title.
|
||
|
4 Set the text color by string. See the -C command for a description
|
||
|
of how the string will be interpreted.
|
||
|
5 Set the page color by string.
|
||
|
6 Set the selection text color by string.
|
||
|
7 Set the selection page color by string.
|
||
|
8 Set the cursor text color by string.
|
||
|
9 Set the cursor page color by string.
|
||
|
10 Set the half intensity color by string.
|
||
|
11 Set the bold intensity color by string.
|
||
|
101 Bind the string to the key named by Pn+1. The key numbers are the
|
||
|
same as the numbers defined in <device.h>. The string can contain
|
||
|
C style backslashed characters to get control characters into the
|
||
|
string. When the key is pressed the value will be sent to the
|
||
|
process that xwsh is managing. This capability is turned off by
|
||
|
default for security. Turn it on with the "-bindkey2dcs" command
|
||
|
line option or with the "bindKey2DCS" resource.
|
||
|
103 Bind the string to the key named by Pn+1. The key numbers are the
|
||
|
same as the numbers defined in <device.h>. When the key is pressed
|
||
|
the value will be used to invoke a function internal to xwsh. This
|
||
|
capability is turned off by default for security. Turn it on with
|
||
|
the "-bindkey2dcs" command line option or with the "bindKey2DCS"
|
||
|
resource.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
|
||
|
Status: SGI private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: PU1 or ESC Q
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PU1
|
||
|
Description: Private use one
|
||
|
|
||
|
PU1 is reserved for a function without standardized meaning for
|
||
|
private use as required, subject to the prior agreement between the
|
||
|
sender and the recipient of the data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.100
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: PU2 or ESC R
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PU2
|
||
|
Description: Private use two
|
||
|
|
||
|
PU2 is reserved for a function without standardized meaning for
|
||
|
private use as required, subject to the prior agreement between the
|
||
|
sender and the recipient of the data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.101
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: STS or ESC S
|
||
|
Mnemonic: STS
|
||
|
Description: Set transmit state
|
||
|
|
||
|
STS is used to establish the transmit state in the receiving
|
||
|
device. In this state the transmission of data from the device is
|
||
|
possible.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The actual initiation of transmission of data is performed by a data
|
||
|
communication or input/output interface control procedure which is
|
||
|
outside the scope of this Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The transmit state is established either by STS appearing in the
|
||
|
received data stream or by the operation of an appropriate key on a
|
||
|
keyboard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.145
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CCH or ESC T
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CCH
|
||
|
Description: Cancel character
|
||
|
|
||
|
CCH is used to indicate that both the preceding graphic character in
|
||
|
the data stream, (represented by one or more bit combinations)
|
||
|
including SPACE, and the control function CCH itself are to be ignored
|
||
|
for further interpretation of the data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the character preceding CCH in the data stream is a control
|
||
|
function (represented by one or more bit combinations), the effect of
|
||
|
CCH is not defined by this Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.8
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: MW or ESC U
|
||
|
Mnemonic: MW
|
||
|
Description: Message waiting
|
||
|
|
||
|
MW is used to set a message waiting indicator in the receiving
|
||
|
device. An appropriate acknowledgement to the receipt of MW may be
|
||
|
given by using DEVICE STATUS REPORT (DSR).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.83
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: SPA or ESC V
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SPA
|
||
|
Description: Start of guarded area
|
||
|
|
||
|
SPA is used to indicate that the active presentation position is the
|
||
|
first of a string of character positions in the presentation
|
||
|
component, the contents of which are protected against manual
|
||
|
alteration, are guarded against transmission or transfer, depending on
|
||
|
the setting of the GUARDED AREA TRANSFER MODE (GATM) and may be
|
||
|
protected against erasure, depending on the setting of the ERASURE
|
||
|
MODE (ERM). The end of this string is indicated by END OF GUARDED AREA
|
||
|
(EPA).
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
|
||
|
should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.129
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: EPA or ESC W
|
||
|
Mnemonic: EPA
|
||
|
Description: End of guarded area
|
||
|
|
||
|
EPA is used to indicate that the active presentation position is the
|
||
|
last of a string of character positions in the presentation component,
|
||
|
the contents of which are protected against manual alteration, are
|
||
|
guarded against transmission or transfer, depending on the setting of
|
||
|
the GUARDED AREA TRANSFER MODE (GATM), and may be protected against
|
||
|
erasure, depending on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM). The
|
||
|
beginning of this string is indicated by START OF GUARDED AREA (SPA).
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
|
||
|
should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.46
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: SOS or ESC X
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SOS
|
||
|
Description: Start of string
|
||
|
|
||
|
SOS is used as the opening delimiter of a control string. The
|
||
|
character string following may consist of any bit combination, except
|
||
|
those representing SOS or STRING TERMINATOR (ST). The control string
|
||
|
is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING TERMINATOR (ST). The
|
||
|
interpretation of the character string depends on the application.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.128
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: SCI or ESC Z
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SCI
|
||
|
Description: Single character introducer
|
||
|
|
||
|
SCI and the bit combination following it are used to represent a
|
||
|
control function or a graphic character. The bit combination
|
||
|
following SCI must be from 00/08 to 00/13 or 02/00 to 07/14. The use
|
||
|
of SCI is reserved for future standardization.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.109
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI or ESC [
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CSI
|
||
|
Description: Control sequence introducer
|
||
|
|
||
|
CSI is used as the first character of a control sequence.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.16
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn @
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ICH
|
||
|
Description: Insert character
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, ICH
|
||
|
is used to prepare the insertion of n characters, by putting into the
|
||
|
erased state the active presentation position and, depending on the
|
||
|
setting of the CHARACTER EDITING MODE (HEM), the n-1 preceding or
|
||
|
following character positions in the presentation component, where n
|
||
|
equals the value of Pn. The previous contents of the active
|
||
|
presentation position and an adjacent string of character positions
|
||
|
are shifted away from the active presentation position. The contents
|
||
|
of n character positions at the other end of the shifted part are
|
||
|
removed. The active presentation position is moved to the line home
|
||
|
position in the active line. The line home position is established by
|
||
|
the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
|
||
|
|
||
|
The extent of the shifted part is established by SELECT EDITING EXTENT
|
||
|
(SEE).
|
||
|
|
||
|
The effect of ICH on the start or end of a selected area, the start or
|
||
|
end of a qualified area, or a tabulation stop in the shifted part, is
|
||
|
not defined by this Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, ICH is used
|
||
|
to prepare the insertion of n characters, by putting into the erased
|
||
|
state the active data position and, depending on the setting of the
|
||
|
CHARACTER EDITING MODE (HEM), the n-1 preceding or following character
|
||
|
positions in the data component, where n equals the value of Pn. The
|
||
|
previous contents of the active data position and an adjacent string
|
||
|
of character positions are shifted away from the active data
|
||
|
position. The contents of n character positions at the other end of
|
||
|
the shifted part are removed. The active data position is moved to the
|
||
|
line home position in the active line. The line home position is
|
||
|
established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.64
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn A
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CUU
|
||
|
Description: Cursor up
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
CUU causes the active presentation position to be moved upwards in the
|
||
|
presentation component by n line positions if the character path is
|
||
|
horizontal, or by n character positions if the character path is
|
||
|
vertical, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.22
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Pc A
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SBC
|
||
|
Description: set border color
|
||
|
|
||
|
Set the overscan (border) to the color specified.
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 => black 8 => grey
|
||
|
1 => blue 9 => light blue
|
||
|
2 => green 10 => light green
|
||
|
3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
|
||
|
4 => red 12 => light red
|
||
|
5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
|
||
|
6 => brown 14 => yellow
|
||
|
7 => white 15 => light white
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn B
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CUD
|
||
|
Description: Cursor down
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
CUD causes the active presentation position to be moved downwards in
|
||
|
the presentation component by n line positions if the character path
|
||
|
is horizontal, or by n character positions if the character path is
|
||
|
vertical, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.19
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Pn1 ; Pn2 B
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SBP
|
||
|
Description: Set bell parameters
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets bell parameters (where Pn1 is the pitch in Hz and Pn2 is the
|
||
|
duration in milliseconds)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Set the frequency (Pn1) and duration (Pn2) of the audible bell. The
|
||
|
frequency is in units of 840.3 nanoseconds, and the duration is in
|
||
|
units of 100 milliseconds.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: iBCS2 private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn C
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CUF
|
||
|
Description: Cursor right
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
CUF causes the active presentation position to be moved rightwards in
|
||
|
the presentation component by n character positions if the character
|
||
|
path is horizontal, or by n line positions if the character path is
|
||
|
vertical, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.20
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Pn1 ; Pn2 C
|
||
|
Description: Set cursor parameters
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets cursor parameters (where Pn1 is the starting and Pn2 is the
|
||
|
ending scanlines of the cursor).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn D
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CUB
|
||
|
Description: Cursor left
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
CUB causes the active presentation position to be moved leftwards in
|
||
|
the presentation component by n character positions if the character
|
||
|
path is horizontal, or by n line positions if the character path is
|
||
|
vertical, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.18
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Ps D
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SBI
|
||
|
Description: Set background intensity
|
||
|
|
||
|
Turns the intensity of background colors on (Ps = 1) or off (Ps = 0).
|
||
|
Any characters printed with the ``blink'' attribute modifier will
|
||
|
instead be displayed as having an intense background.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn E
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CNL
|
||
|
Description: Cursor next line
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
CNL causes the active presentation position to be moved to the first
|
||
|
character position of the n-th following line in the presentation
|
||
|
component, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.12
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Ps E
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SBB
|
||
|
Description: Set background blink bit
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets (Ps = 1) or clears (Ps = 0) the Blink versus Bold background bit
|
||
|
in the M6845 CRT controller. The parameters are the exact inverse of
|
||
|
the SBI sequence above. Other than that, they behave the same on the
|
||
|
console. In GUI versions of scoansi, the application may distinguish
|
||
|
between these two sequences.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn F
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CPL
|
||
|
Description: Cursor preceding line
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
CPL causes the active presentation position to be moved to the first
|
||
|
character position of the n-th preceding line in the presentation
|
||
|
component, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.13
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Pc F
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SNF
|
||
|
Description: set normal foreground color
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets normal foreground color according to Pc:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 => black 8 => grey
|
||
|
1 => blue 9 => light blue
|
||
|
2 => green 10 => light green
|
||
|
3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
|
||
|
4 => red 12 => light red
|
||
|
5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
|
||
|
6 => brown 14 => yellow
|
||
|
7 => white 15 => light white
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Csi =<n>F Set the default normal foreground color to <n>.
|
||
|
This sequence also sets the current color to <n>.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn G
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CHA
|
||
|
Description: Cursor character absolute
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
CHA causes the active presentation position to be moved to character
|
||
|
position n in the active line in the presentation component, where n
|
||
|
equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.5.9
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Pc G
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SNB
|
||
|
Description: set normal background color
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets normal background color according to Pc:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 => black 8 => grey
|
||
|
1 => blue 9 => light blue
|
||
|
2 => green 10 => light green
|
||
|
3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
|
||
|
4 => red 12 => light red
|
||
|
5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
|
||
|
6 => brown 14 => yellow
|
||
|
7 => white 15 => light white
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Csi =<n>G Set the default normal background color to <n>.
|
||
|
This sequence also sets the current color to <n>.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 H
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CUP
|
||
|
Description: Cursor position
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default values: Pn1 = 1; Pn2 = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
CUP causes the active presentation position to be moved in the
|
||
|
presentation component to the n-th line position according to the line
|
||
|
progression and to the m-th character position according to the
|
||
|
character path, where n equals the value of Pn1 and m equals the value
|
||
|
of Pn2.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.21
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Pc H
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SRF
|
||
|
Description: set reverse foreground color
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets reverse foreground color according to Pc:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 => black 8 => grey
|
||
|
1 => blue 9 => light blue
|
||
|
2 => green 10 => light green
|
||
|
3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
|
||
|
4 => red 12 => light red
|
||
|
5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
|
||
|
6 => brown 14 => yellow
|
||
|
7 => white 15 => light white
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn I
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CHT
|
||
|
Description: Cursor forward tabulation
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
CHT causes the active presentation position to be moved to the
|
||
|
character position corresponding to the n-th following character
|
||
|
tabulation stop in the presentation component, according to the
|
||
|
character path, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.5.10
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Pc I
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SRB
|
||
|
Description: set reverse background color
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets reverse background color according to Pc:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 => black 8 => grey
|
||
|
1 => blue 9 => light blue
|
||
|
2 => green 10 => light green
|
||
|
3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
|
||
|
4 => red 12 => light red
|
||
|
5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
|
||
|
6 => brown 14 => yellow
|
||
|
7 => white 15 => light white
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = ? I
|
||
|
Description: Screen saver off
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: jaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals
|
||
|
<7t2fe1$gj0$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>
|
||
|
Status: BA80 private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps J
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ED
|
||
|
Description: Erase in page
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, ED
|
||
|
causes some or all character positions of the active page (the page
|
||
|
which contains the active presentation position in the presentation
|
||
|
component) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter
|
||
|
values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 the active presentation position and the character positions up to
|
||
|
the end of the page are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the character positions from the beginning of the page up to and
|
||
|
including the active presentation position are put into the erased
|
||
|
state
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 all character positions of the page are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, ED causes
|
||
|
some or all character positions of the active page (the page which
|
||
|
contains the active data position in the data component) to be put
|
||
|
into the erased state, depending on the parameter values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 the active data position and the character positions up to the end
|
||
|
of the page are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the character positions from the beginning of the page up to and
|
||
|
including the active data position are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 all character positions of the page are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the
|
||
|
erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only,
|
||
|
depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.39
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Pc J
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SGF
|
||
|
Description: Set graphic foreground color
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets graphic foreground color according to Pc:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 => black 8 => grey
|
||
|
1 => blue 9 => light blue
|
||
|
2 => green 10 => light green
|
||
|
3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
|
||
|
4 => red 12 => light red
|
||
|
5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
|
||
|
6 => brown 14 => yellow
|
||
|
7 => white 15 => light white
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ? Ps J
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSED
|
||
|
Description: Selective erase in display
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
Depending on the value of Ps:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) from and including the
|
||
|
cursor to the end of the screen. Does not affect video line attributes
|
||
|
or video character attributes (SGR).
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) from the beginning of the
|
||
|
screen to and including the cursor. Does not affect video line
|
||
|
attributes or video character attributes (SGR).
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) in the entire display. Does
|
||
|
not affect video character attributes or video line attributes (SGR).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT200
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ? = J
|
||
|
Description: Screen saver on
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: jaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals
|
||
|
<7t2fe1$gj0$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>
|
||
|
Status: BA80 private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps K
|
||
|
Mnemonic: EL
|
||
|
Description: Erase in line
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, EL
|
||
|
causes some or all character positions of the active line (the line
|
||
|
which contains the active presentation position in the presentation
|
||
|
component) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter
|
||
|
values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 the active presentation position and the character positions up to
|
||
|
the end of the line are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the character positions from the beginning of the line up to and
|
||
|
including the active presentation position are put into the erased
|
||
|
state
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 all character positions of the line are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, EL causes
|
||
|
some or all character positions of the active line (the line which
|
||
|
contains the active data position in the data component) to be put
|
||
|
into the erased state, depending on the parameter values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 the active data position and the character positions up to the end
|
||
|
of the line are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the character positions from the beginning of the line up to and
|
||
|
including the active data position are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 all character positions of the line are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the
|
||
|
erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only,
|
||
|
depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.41
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Pc K
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SGB
|
||
|
Description: set graphic background color
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets graphic background color according to Pc:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 => black 8 => grey
|
||
|
1 => blue 9 => light blue
|
||
|
2 => green 10 => light green
|
||
|
3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
|
||
|
4 => red 12 => light red
|
||
|
5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
|
||
|
6 => brown 14 => yellow
|
||
|
7 => white 15 => light white
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ? Ps K
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSEL
|
||
|
Description: Selective erase in line
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
Depending on the value of Ps:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) from the cursor to the end
|
||
|
of the line. Does not affect video line attributes or video character
|
||
|
attributes (SGR).
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) from the beginning of the
|
||
|
line to and including the cursor position. Does not affect video line
|
||
|
attributes or video character attributes.
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) on the line. Does not
|
||
|
affect video line attributes or video character attributes.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT200
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn L
|
||
|
Mnemonic: IL
|
||
|
Description: Insert line
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, IL
|
||
|
is used to prepare the insertion of n lines, by putting into the
|
||
|
erased state in the presentation component the active line (the line
|
||
|
that contains the active presentation position) and, depending on the
|
||
|
setting of the LINE EDITING MODE (VEM), the n-1 preceding or following
|
||
|
lines, where n equals the value of Pn. The previous contents of the
|
||
|
active line and of adjacent lines are shifted away from the active
|
||
|
line. The contents of n lines at the other end of the shifted part are
|
||
|
removed. The active presentation position is moved to the line home
|
||
|
position in the active line. The line home position is established by
|
||
|
the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
|
||
|
|
||
|
The extent of the shifted part is established by SELECT EDITING EXTENT
|
||
|
(SEE).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Any occurrences of the start or end of a selected area, the start or
|
||
|
end of a qualified area, or a tabulation stop in the shifted part, are
|
||
|
also shifted.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM) is set to SINGLE, character
|
||
|
tabulation stops are cleared in the lines that are put into the erased
|
||
|
state.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, IL is used
|
||
|
to prepare the insertion of n lines, by putting into the erased state
|
||
|
in the data component the active line (the line that contains the
|
||
|
active data position) and, depending on the setting of the LINE
|
||
|
EDITING MODE (VEM), the n-1 preceding or following lines, where n
|
||
|
equals the value of Pn. The previous contents of the active line and
|
||
|
of adjacent lines are shifted away from the active line. The contents
|
||
|
of n lines at the other end of the shifted part are removed. The
|
||
|
active data position is moved to the line home position in the active
|
||
|
line. The line home position is established by the parameter value of
|
||
|
SET LINE HOME (SLH).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.67
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Ps L
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SEF
|
||
|
Description: Set emulator feature
|
||
|
|
||
|
Control the various emulator features. Parameter Ps indicates the
|
||
|
action to be taken:
|
||
|
|
||
|
----------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Value Meaning
|
||
|
----------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
0 New regions filled with the current attribute (default)
|
||
|
1 New regions filled with the normal attribute
|
||
|
2 Disable iBCS2 compliance (default)
|
||
|
3 Enable iBCS2 compliance
|
||
|
4 Disable ANSI SGR0 interpretation (default)
|
||
|
5 Enable ANSI SGR0 interpretation
|
||
|
6 Disable backwards compatibility mode (default)
|
||
|
7 Enable backwards compatibility mode (resets margins too)
|
||
|
8 Cursor motion bound by region (default)
|
||
|
9 Cursor motion unbound
|
||
|
10 Enable 8-bit keyboard meta mode (default)
|
||
|
11 Disable 8-bit keyboard meta mode
|
||
|
12 Disable debugging for this screen (default)
|
||
|
13 Enable debugging for this screen (do not use)
|
||
|
14 Disable global video loop debugging (default)
|
||
|
15 Enable global video loop debugging (do not use)
|
||
|
16 Enable M6845 frame buffer optimization (default)
|
||
|
17 Disable M6845 frame buffer optimization (debugging only)
|
||
|
20 Disable using ESC for meta (high) bit.
|
||
|
21 Enable using ESC for meta (high) bit.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn M
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DL
|
||
|
Description: Delete line
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, DL
|
||
|
causes the contents of the active line (the line that contains the
|
||
|
active presentation position) and, depending on the setting of the
|
||
|
LINE EDITING MODE (VEM), the contents of the n-1 preceding or
|
||
|
following lines to be removed from the presentation component, where n
|
||
|
equals the value of Pn. The resulting gap is closed by shifting the
|
||
|
contents of a number of adjacent lines towards the active line. At the
|
||
|
other end of the shifted part, n lines are put into the erased state.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The active presentation position is moved to the line home position in
|
||
|
the active line. The line home position is established by the
|
||
|
parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). If the TABULATION STOP MODE
|
||
|
(TSM) is set to SINGLE, character tabulation stops are cleared in the
|
||
|
lines that are put into the erased state.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The extent of the shifted part is established by SELECT EDITING EXTENT (SEE).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Any occurrences of the start or end of a selected area, the start or
|
||
|
end of a qualified area, or a tabulation stop in the shifted part, are
|
||
|
also shifted.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, DL causes
|
||
|
the contents of the active line (the line that contains the active
|
||
|
data position) and, depending on the setting of the LINE EDITING MODE
|
||
|
(VEM), the contents of the n-1 preceding or following lines to be
|
||
|
removed from the data component, where n equals the value of Pn. The
|
||
|
resulting gap is closed by shifting the contents of a number of
|
||
|
adjacent lines towards the active line. At the other end of the
|
||
|
shifted part, n lines are put into the erased state. The active data
|
||
|
position is moved to the line home position in the active line. The
|
||
|
line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE
|
||
|
HOME (SLH).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.32
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Ps M
|
||
|
Mnemonic: RAS
|
||
|
Description: Return attribute setting
|
||
|
|
||
|
Use this sequence to return the current settings for the attribute
|
||
|
type specified by Ps. Attributes are returned via the keyboard data
|
||
|
input stream as text decimal numbers separated by a space and
|
||
|
terminated with a newline. The attribute values returned use the ISO
|
||
|
color numbering scheme. For example, if the current normal attribute
|
||
|
setting is bright yellow on a blue background, CSI = 0 M would return
|
||
|
``14 1\n''. Ps can be one of the following values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
---------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Value Meaning
|
||
|
---------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
0 Return the current normal attribute setting
|
||
|
1 Return the current reverse video attribute setting
|
||
|
2 Return the current graphic character attribute setting
|
||
|
|
||
|
Colour are:
|
||
|
0 => black 8 => grey
|
||
|
1 => blue 9 => light blue
|
||
|
2 => green 10 => light green
|
||
|
3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
|
||
|
4 => red 12 => light red
|
||
|
5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
|
||
|
6 => brown 14 => yellow
|
||
|
7 => white 15 => light white
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps N
|
||
|
Mnemonic: EF
|
||
|
Description: Erase in field
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, EF
|
||
|
causes some or all character positions of the active field (the field
|
||
|
which contains the active presentation position in the presentation
|
||
|
component) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter
|
||
|
values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 the active presentation position and the character positions up to
|
||
|
the end of the field are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the character positions from the beginning of the field up to and
|
||
|
including the active presentation position are put into the erased
|
||
|
state
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 all character positions of the field are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, EF causes
|
||
|
some or all character positions of the active field (the field which
|
||
|
contains the active data position in the data component) to be put
|
||
|
into the erased state, depending on the parameter values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 the active data position and the character positions up to the end
|
||
|
of the field are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the character positions from the beginning of the field up to and
|
||
|
including the active data position are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 all character positions of the field are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the
|
||
|
erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only,
|
||
|
depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.40
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps O
|
||
|
Mnemonic: EA
|
||
|
Description Erase in area
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, EA
|
||
|
causes some or all character positions in the active qualified area
|
||
|
(the qualified area in the presentation component which contains the
|
||
|
active presentation position) to be put into the erased state,
|
||
|
depending on the parameter values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 the active presentation position and the character positions up to
|
||
|
the end of the qualified area are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the character positions from the beginning of the qualified area up
|
||
|
to and including the active presentation position are put into the
|
||
|
erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 all character positions of the qualified area are put into the
|
||
|
erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, EA causes
|
||
|
some or all character positions in the active qualified area (the
|
||
|
qualified area in the data component which contains the active data
|
||
|
position) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter
|
||
|
values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 the active data position and the character positions up to the end
|
||
|
of the qualified area are put into the erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the character positions from the beginning of the qualified area up
|
||
|
to and including the active data position are put into the erased
|
||
|
state
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 all character positions of the qualified area are put into the
|
||
|
erased state
|
||
|
|
||
|
Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the
|
||
|
erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only,
|
||
|
depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.37
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn P
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DCH
|
||
|
Description: Delete character
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, DCH
|
||
|
causes the contents of the active presentation position and, depending
|
||
|
on the setting of the CHARACTER EDITING MODE (HEM), the contents of
|
||
|
the n-1 preceding or following character positions to be removed from
|
||
|
the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. The
|
||
|
resulting gap is closed by shifting the contents of the adjacent
|
||
|
character positions towards the active presentation position. At the
|
||
|
other end of the shifted part, n character positions are put into the
|
||
|
erased state.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The extent of the shifted part is established by SELECT EDITING EXTENT (SEE).
|
||
|
|
||
|
The effect of DCH on the start or end of a selected area, the start or
|
||
|
end of a qualified area, or a tabulation stop in the shifted part is
|
||
|
not defined by this Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, DCH causes
|
||
|
the contents of the active data position and, depending on the setting
|
||
|
of the CHARACTER EDITING MODE (HEM), the contents of the n-1 preceding
|
||
|
or following character positions to be removed from the data
|
||
|
component, where n equals the value of Pn. The resulting gap is closed
|
||
|
by shifting the contents of the adjacent character positions towards
|
||
|
the active data position. At the other end of the shifted part, n
|
||
|
character positions are put into the erased state.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.26
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps Q
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SEE
|
||
|
Description: Select editing extent
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SEE is used to establish the editing extent for subsequent character
|
||
|
or line insertion or deletion. The established extent remains in
|
||
|
effect until the next occurrence of SEE in the data stream. The
|
||
|
editing extent depends on the parameter value:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 the shifted part is limited to the active page in the presentation
|
||
|
component
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the shifted part is limited to the active line in the presentation
|
||
|
component
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 the shifted part is limited to the active field in the presentation
|
||
|
component
|
||
|
|
||
|
3 the shifted part is limited to the active qualified area
|
||
|
|
||
|
4 the shifted part consists of the relevant part of the entire
|
||
|
presentation component.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.115
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 R
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CPR
|
||
|
Description: Active position report
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default values: Pn1 = 1; Pn2 = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, CPR
|
||
|
is used to report the active presentation position of the sending
|
||
|
device as residing in the presentation component at the n-th line
|
||
|
position according to the line progression and at the m-th character
|
||
|
position according to the character path, where n equals the value of
|
||
|
Pn1 and m equals the value of Pn2.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, CPR is used
|
||
|
to report the active data position of the sending device as residing
|
||
|
in the data component at the n-th line position according to the line
|
||
|
progression and at the m-th character position according to the
|
||
|
character progression, where n equals the value of Pn1 and m equals
|
||
|
the value of Pn2.
|
||
|
|
||
|
CPR may be solicited by a DEVICE STATUS REPORT (DSR) or be sent
|
||
|
unsolicited.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.14
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn S
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SU
|
||
|
Description: Scroll up
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
SU causes the data in the presentation component to be moved by n line
|
||
|
positions if the line orientation is horizontal, or by n character
|
||
|
positions if the line orientation is vertical, such that the data
|
||
|
appear to move up; where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The active presentation position is not affected by this control
|
||
|
function.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.147
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn T
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SD
|
||
|
Description: Scroll down
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
SD causes the data in the presentation component to be moved by n line
|
||
|
positions if the line orientation is horizontal, or by n character
|
||
|
positions if the line orientation is vertical, such that the data
|
||
|
appear to move down; where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The active presentation position is not affected by this control
|
||
|
function.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.113
|
||
|
|
||
|
[ NB: that paragraph of the standard erroneously claims SD is CSI Pn ^. ]
|
||
|
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 T
|
||
|
Description: Initiate hilite mouse tracking
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn U
|
||
|
Mnemonic: NP
|
||
|
Description: Next page
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
NP causes the n-th following page in the presentation component to be
|
||
|
displayed, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The effect of this control function on the active presentation
|
||
|
position is not defined by this Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.87
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn V
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PP
|
||
|
Description: Preceding page
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
PP causes the n-th preceding page in the presentation component to be
|
||
|
displayed, where n equals the value of Pn. The effect of this control
|
||
|
function on the active presentation position is not defined by this
|
||
|
Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.95
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ... W
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CTC
|
||
|
Description: Cursor tabulation control
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
CTC causes one or more tabulation stops to be set or cleared in the
|
||
|
presentation component, depending on the parameter values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 a character tabulation stop is set at the active presentation position
|
||
|
1 a line tabulation stop is set at the active line (the line that
|
||
|
contains the active presentation position)
|
||
|
2 the character tabulation stop at the active presentation position is
|
||
|
cleared
|
||
|
3 the line tabulation stop at the active line is cleared
|
||
|
4 all character tabulation stops in the active line are cleared
|
||
|
5 all character tabulation stops are cleared
|
||
|
6 all line tabulation stops are cleared
|
||
|
|
||
|
In the case of parameter values 0, 2 or 4 the number of lines affected
|
||
|
depends on the setting of the TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.17
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn X
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ECH
|
||
|
Description: Erase character
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, ECH
|
||
|
causes the active presentation position and the n-1 following
|
||
|
character positions in the presentation component to be put into the
|
||
|
erased state, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, ECH causes
|
||
|
the active data position and the n-1 following character positions in
|
||
|
the data component to be put into the erased state, where n equals the
|
||
|
value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the
|
||
|
erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only,
|
||
|
depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.38
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn Y
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CVT
|
||
|
Description: Cursor line tabulation
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
CVT causes the active presentation position to be moved to the
|
||
|
corresponding character position of the line corresponding to the n-th
|
||
|
following line tabulation stop in the presentation component, where n
|
||
|
equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 8.3.23
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn Z
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CBT
|
||
|
Description: Cursor backward tabulation
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
CBT causes the active presentation position to be moved to the
|
||
|
character position corresponding to the n-th preceding character
|
||
|
tabulation stop in the presentation component, according to the
|
||
|
character path, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.7
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps [
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SRS
|
||
|
Description: Start reversed string
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SRS is used to establish in the data component the beginning and the
|
||
|
end of a string of characters as well as the direction of the
|
||
|
string. This direction is opposite to that currently established. The
|
||
|
indicated string follows the preceding text. The established character
|
||
|
progression is not affected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The beginning of a reversed string is indicated by SRS with a
|
||
|
parameter value of 1. A reversed string may contain one or more nested
|
||
|
strings. These nested strings may be reversed strings the beginnings
|
||
|
of which are indicated by SRS with a parameter value of 1, or directed
|
||
|
strings the beginnings of which are indicated by START DIRECTED STRING
|
||
|
(SDS) with a parameter value not equal to 0. Every beginning of such a
|
||
|
string invokes the next deeper level of nesting.
|
||
|
|
||
|
This Standard does not define the location of the active data position
|
||
|
within any such nested string.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The end of a reversed string is indicated by SRS with a parameter
|
||
|
value of 0. Every end of such a string re-establishes the next higher
|
||
|
level of nesting (the one in effect prior to the string just
|
||
|
ended). The direction is re-established to that in effect prior to the
|
||
|
string just ended. The active data position is moved to the character
|
||
|
position following the characters of the string just ended.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The parameter values are:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 end of a reversed string; re-establish the previous direction
|
||
|
1 beginning of a reversed string; reverse the direction.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE 1
|
||
|
The effect of receiving a CVT, HT, SCP, SPD or VT control function
|
||
|
within an SRS string is not defined by this Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE 2
|
||
|
The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
|
||
|
should not be used within an SRS string.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.137
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI [
|
||
|
Description: Ignore next character
|
||
|
|
||
|
However, after CSI [ (or ESC [ [) a single character is read and this
|
||
|
entire sequence is ignored. (The idea is to ignore an echoed function
|
||
|
key.)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: Linux private; clashes with ECMA-48 SRS
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps \
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PTX
|
||
|
Description: Parallel texts
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
PTX is used to delimit strings of graphic characters that are
|
||
|
communicated one after another in the data stream but that are
|
||
|
intended to be presented in parallel with one another, usually in
|
||
|
adjacent lines.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The parameter values are
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 end of parallel texts
|
||
|
1 beginning of a string of principal parallel text
|
||
|
2 beginning of a string of supplementary parallel text
|
||
|
3 beginning of a string of supplementary Japanese phonetic annotation
|
||
|
4 beginning of a string of supplementary Chinese phonetic annotation
|
||
|
5 end of a string of supplementary phonetic annotations
|
||
|
|
||
|
PTX with a parameter value of 1 indicates the beginning of the string
|
||
|
of principal text intended to be presented in parallel with one or
|
||
|
more strings of supplementary text. PTX with a parameter value of 2,
|
||
|
3 or 4 indicates the beginning of a string of supplementary text that
|
||
|
is intended to be presented in parallel with either a string of
|
||
|
principal text or the immediately preceding string of supplementary
|
||
|
text, if any; at the same time it indicates the end of the preceding
|
||
|
string of principal text or of the immediately preceding string of
|
||
|
supplementary text, if any. The end of a string of supplementary text
|
||
|
is indicated by a subsequent occurrence of PTX with a parameter value
|
||
|
other than 1.
|
||
|
|
||
|
PTX with a parameter value of 0 indicates the end of the strings of
|
||
|
text intended to be presented in parallel with one another.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
|
||
|
PTX does not explicitly specify the relative placement of the strings
|
||
|
of principal and supplementary parallel texts, or the relative sizes
|
||
|
of graphic characters in the strings of parallel text. A string of
|
||
|
supplementary text is normally presented in a line adjacent to the
|
||
|
line containing the string of principal text, or adjacent to the line
|
||
|
containing the immediately preceding string of supplementary text, if
|
||
|
any. The first graphic character of the string of principal text and
|
||
|
the first graphic character of a string of supplementary text are
|
||
|
normally presented in the same position of their respective lines.
|
||
|
However, a string of supplementary text longer (when presented) than
|
||
|
the associated string of principal text may be centred on that
|
||
|
string. In the case of long strings of text, such as paragraphs in
|
||
|
different languages, the strings may be presented in successive lines
|
||
|
in parallel columns, with their beginnings aligned with one another
|
||
|
and the shorter of the paragraphs followed by an appropriate amount of
|
||
|
"white space".
|
||
|
|
||
|
Japanese phonetic annotation typically consists of a few half-size or
|
||
|
smaller Kana characters which indicate the pronunciation or
|
||
|
interpretation of one or more Kanji characters and are presented above
|
||
|
those Kanji characters if the character path is horizontal, or to the
|
||
|
right of them if the character path is vertical.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Chinese phonetic annotation typically consists of a few Pinyin
|
||
|
characters which indicate the pronunciation of one or more Hanzi
|
||
|
characters and are presented above those Hanzi characters.
|
||
|
Alternatively, the Pinyin characters may be presented in the same line
|
||
|
as the Hanzi characters and following the respective Hanzi
|
||
|
characters. The Pinyin characters will then be presented within
|
||
|
enclosing pairs of parentheses.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.99
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ]
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SDS
|
||
|
Description: Start directed string
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SDS is used to establish in the data component the beginning and the
|
||
|
end of a string of characters as well as the direction of the
|
||
|
string. This direction may be different from that currently
|
||
|
established. The indicated string follows the preceding text. The
|
||
|
established character progression is not affected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The beginning of a directed string is indicated by SDS with a
|
||
|
parameter value not equal to 0. A directed string may contain one or
|
||
|
more nested strings. These nested strings may be directed strings the
|
||
|
beginnings of which are indicated by SDS with a parameter value not
|
||
|
equal to 0, or reversed strings the beginnings of which are indicated
|
||
|
by START REVERSED STRING (SRS) with a parameter value of 1. Every
|
||
|
beginning of such a string invokes the next deeper level of nesting.
|
||
|
|
||
|
This Standard does not define the location of the active data position
|
||
|
within any such nested string.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The end of a directed string is indicated by SDS with a parameter
|
||
|
value of 0. Every end of such a string re-establishes the next higher
|
||
|
level of nesting (the one in effect prior to the string just
|
||
|
ended). The direction is re-established to that in effect prior to the
|
||
|
string just ended. The active data position is moved to the character
|
||
|
position following the characters of the string just ended.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The parameter values are:
|
||
|
0 end of a directed string; re-establish the previous direction
|
||
|
1 start of a directed string; establish the direction left-to-right
|
||
|
2 start of a directed string; establish the direction right-to-left
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE 1
|
||
|
The effect of receiving a CVT, HT, SCP, SPD or VT control function
|
||
|
within an SDS string is not defined by this Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE 2
|
||
|
The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
|
||
|
should not be used within an SDS string.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.114
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ; Pn ... ]
|
||
|
Description: Linux private sequences
|
||
|
|
||
|
ESC [ 1 ; n ] Set color n as the underline color
|
||
|
ESC [ 2 ; n ] Set color n as the dim color
|
||
|
ESC [ 8 ] Make the current color pair the default attributes.
|
||
|
ESC [ 9 ; n ] Set screen blank timeout to n minutes.
|
||
|
ESC [ 10 ; n ] Set bell frequency in Hz.
|
||
|
ESC [ 11 ; n ] Set bell duration in msec.
|
||
|
ESC [ 12 ; n ] Bring specified console to the front.
|
||
|
ESC [ 13 ] Unblank the screen.
|
||
|
ESC [ 14 ; n ] Set the VESA powerdown interval in minutes.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: Linux private; clashes with ECMA-48 SDS
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ^
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SIMD
|
||
|
Description: Select implicit movement direction
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SIMD is used to select the direction of implicit movement of the data
|
||
|
position relative to the character progression. The direction selected
|
||
|
remains in effect until the next occurrence of SIMD.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The parameter values are:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 the direction of implicit movement is the same as that of the
|
||
|
character progression
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the direction of implicit movement is opposite to that of the
|
||
|
character progression.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.120
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn `
|
||
|
Mnemonic: HPA
|
||
|
Description: Character position absolute
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
HPA causes the active data position to be moved to character position
|
||
|
n in the active line (the line in the data component that contains the
|
||
|
active data position), where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.57
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn a
|
||
|
Mnemonic: HPR
|
||
|
Description: Character position forward
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
HPR causes the active data position to be moved by n character
|
||
|
positions in the data component in the direction of the character
|
||
|
progression, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.59
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn b
|
||
|
Mnemonic: REP
|
||
|
Description: Repeat
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
REP is used to indicate that the preceding character in the data
|
||
|
stream, if it is a graphic character (represented by one or more bit
|
||
|
combinations) including SPACE, is to be repeated n times, where n
|
||
|
equals the value of Pn. If the character preceding REP is a control
|
||
|
function or part of a control function, the effect of REP is not
|
||
|
defined by this Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.103
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps c
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DA
|
||
|
Description: Device attributes
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
With a parameter value not equal to 0, DA is used to identify the
|
||
|
device which sends the DA. The parameter value is a device type
|
||
|
identification code according to a register which is to be
|
||
|
established. If the parameter value is 0, DA is used to request an
|
||
|
identifying DA from a device.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.24
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Ps c
|
||
|
Mnemonic: HSC
|
||
|
Description: Hide or show cursor
|
||
|
|
||
|
Either hide or show the cursor. When you hide the cursor, scoansi
|
||
|
remembers its previous shape, so that if you restore it, it is
|
||
|
restored to its previous shape. Ps specifies how to handle the
|
||
|
cursor, and can be one of the following values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
---------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Value Meaning
|
||
|
---------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
0 Hide the cursor, saving its shape for a future restore
|
||
|
1 Restore the cursor after hiding or making it very
|
||
|
visible
|
||
|
2 Make the cursor very visible, saving its shape for a
|
||
|
future restore. If you move from a hidden to a very
|
||
|
visible shape, the cursor shape is not stored. This
|
||
|
ensures that when a restore command is given, the
|
||
|
original cursor shape is restored.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ? 10 c
|
||
|
Description: Request DPS configuration
|
||
|
|
||
|
Requests that the terminal sends current DPS (Dot Pattern Set)
|
||
|
configuration.
|
||
|
|
||
|
For the LA100, response is, for each installed DPS (in descending order):
|
||
|
|
||
|
ESC [ Ps1 ; Ps2
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 Location
|
||
|
010 DPS 1
|
||
|
011 DPS 2
|
||
|
012 DPS 3
|
||
|
013 DPS 4
|
||
|
014 DPS 5
|
||
|
|
||
|
[ These are the same numbers as are used to select the DPSes in SGR --bjh ]
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps2 ROM ID
|
||
|
001 US/UK Gothic 10 High Density Primary
|
||
|
002 International Gothic 10 High Density Overlay
|
||
|
003 US/UK Gothic 12 High Density Primary
|
||
|
004 International Gothic 12 High Density Overlay
|
||
|
005 US/UK Courier 10 High Density Primary
|
||
|
006 International Courier 10 High Density Overlay
|
||
|
007 US/UK Courier 12 High Density Primary
|
||
|
008 International Courier 12 High Density Overlay
|
||
|
009 US/UK Orator 10 High Density Primary
|
||
|
|
||
|
For the LA210, the response is:
|
||
|
|
||
|
ESC [ Ps1 ; Ps2 ; Ps3 ; Ps4 ; Ps5 SP D
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 is as for the LA100
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps2 Meaning
|
||
|
1--64 Draft and letter standard DPS
|
||
|
64--128 Draft and memo standard DPS
|
||
|
129--192 Draft and letter custom DPS
|
||
|
192--200 Draft and memo special DPS
|
||
|
|
||
|
Odd-numbered standard DPSes contain US and UK character sets.
|
||
|
Even-numbered ones also contain many others.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps3 Type style
|
||
|
0 none
|
||
|
1 Gothic
|
||
|
5 Courier
|
||
|
9 Orator
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps4 Density
|
||
|
0 12/6 cpi
|
||
|
8 10/5 cpi
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps5 Matrix
|
||
|
0 Letter (33x18)
|
||
|
1 Memo (33x9)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppE6,E48-E50
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LA100, LA210
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ? Ps1 ; Ps2 ; ... ; Psn c
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DS
|
||
|
Description: Device attributes (DEC)
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is a response from the terminal to DA.
|
||
|
Ps1 specifies the operating level of the terminal. This determines
|
||
|
the meaning of the other Pses (if any).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 1 VT100; Ps2 is a bitmask:
|
||
|
1 => STP (processor option)
|
||
|
2 => AVO (advanced video option)
|
||
|
4 => GPO (graphics processor option)
|
||
|
8 => PP???
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 2 VT102
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 4 VT132; Ps2 same as VT100
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 5 VK100 (GIGI)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 6 VT102 (again?)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 7 VT131
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 10 Letterprinter
|
||
|
Ps2 absent => LA100 microcode version 1 (7-bit)
|
||
|
Ps2 == 2 => LA100 microcode version 2 (8-bit)
|
||
|
PS2 == 3 => LA210 microcode version 2 (8-bit)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 12 VT125; Ps2 same as VT100; Graphics firmware version in Ps3
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 13 LQP02
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 15, Ps2 == 1
|
||
|
LA12 (DECwriter Correspondent)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 17 LA50
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 19 DECtalk
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 == 61 Operating level 1 (emulated VT100)
|
||
|
Ps1 == 62 Operating level 2 (VT200)
|
||
|
Ps1 == 63 Operating level 3 (VT300)
|
||
|
Ps1 == 64 Operating level 4 (VT400)
|
||
|
Ps1 == 65 Operating level 5 (VT500)
|
||
|
|
||
|
for 61--62, the other Ps are a list of features:
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps meaning
|
||
|
1 132 columns
|
||
|
2 Printer port
|
||
|
3 ReGIS graphics
|
||
|
4 Sixel graphics
|
||
|
6 Selective erase
|
||
|
7 Soft character set (DRCS)
|
||
|
8 User-defined keys
|
||
|
9 National replacement character sets
|
||
|
10 Text ruling vector
|
||
|
11 25th status line
|
||
|
12 Serbo-croatian (SCS)
|
||
|
13 Local editing mode
|
||
|
14 8-bit architecture
|
||
|
15 Technical character set
|
||
|
16 Locator device port (ReGIS)
|
||
|
17 Terminal state reports
|
||
|
18 Windowing capability
|
||
|
19 Dual sessions
|
||
|
21 Horizontal scrolling
|
||
|
22 Colour
|
||
|
23 Greek
|
||
|
24 Turkish
|
||
|
29 ANSI text locator
|
||
|
39 Page memory extension
|
||
|
42 ISO Latin-2
|
||
|
44 PC Term
|
||
|
45 Soft key mapping
|
||
|
46 ASCII terminal emulation (Wyse, TVI etc)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/msvibm_vt.txt>
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990712 reports.c
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56
|
||
|
ppC31,E11,E19,E50,E84,E90,G6
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI > 0 c
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DA
|
||
|
Description: Device attributes (secondary request)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
Requests secondary attributes from the terminal (model, firmware
|
||
|
version, options).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT220
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI > 0 ; Pv ; Po c
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DA
|
||
|
Description: Device attributes (secondary response; xterm/VT100)
|
||
|
|
||
|
xterm returns this to indicate that it's a VT100 even though a real
|
||
|
VT100 wouldn't.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI > 1 ; Pv ; Po c
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DA
|
||
|
Description: Device attributes (secondary response, VT220)
|
||
|
|
||
|
"I am a VT220 (identification code of 1), my firmware version is _____
|
||
|
(Pv), and I have Po options installed."
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT220
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn d
|
||
|
Mnemonic: VPA
|
||
|
Description: Line position absolute
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
VPA causes the active data position to be moved to line position n in
|
||
|
the data component in a direction parallel to the line progression,
|
||
|
where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.158
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn e
|
||
|
Mnemonic: VPR
|
||
|
Description: Line position forward
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
VPR causes the active data position to be moved by n line positions in
|
||
|
the data component in a direction parallel to the line progression,
|
||
|
where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.160
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 f
|
||
|
Mnemonic: HVP
|
||
|
Description: Character and line position
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default values: Pn1 = 1; Pn2 = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
HVP causes the active data position to be moved in the data component
|
||
|
to the n-th line position according to the line progression and to the
|
||
|
m-th character position according to the character progression, where
|
||
|
n equals the value of Pn1 and m equals the value of Pn2.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.63
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps g
|
||
|
Mnemonic: TBC
|
||
|
Description: Tabulation clear
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
TBC causes one or more tabulation stops in the presentation component
|
||
|
to be cleared, depending on the parameter value:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 the character tabulation stop at the active presentation position is
|
||
|
cleared
|
||
|
1 the line tabulation stop at the active line is cleared
|
||
|
2 all character tabulation stops in the active line are cleared
|
||
|
3 all character tabulation stops are cleared
|
||
|
4 all line tabulation stops are cleared
|
||
|
5 all tabulation stops are cleared
|
||
|
|
||
|
In the case of parameter value 0 or 2 the number of lines affected
|
||
|
depends on the setting of the TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.154
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the first parameter has a value of 100 then tab stops are reset to
|
||
|
the default state (one every 8 columns).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
|
||
|
Status: SGI private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Pn1 g or CSI = Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 g
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PRC
|
||
|
Description: Print ROM character
|
||
|
|
||
|
If only one argument is passed to this function, display the glyph
|
||
|
for the PC ROM character specified by Pn1. If 3 parameters are
|
||
|
passed, then then Pn2 and Pn3 are used to set the graphic character
|
||
|
attribute foreground and background respectively, using the ISO color
|
||
|
numbering scheme described below.
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 => black 8 => grey
|
||
|
1 => blue 9 => light blue
|
||
|
2 => green 10 => light green
|
||
|
3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
|
||
|
4 => red 12 => light red
|
||
|
5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
|
||
|
6 => brown 14 => yellow
|
||
|
7 => white 15 => light white
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI > Pn g
|
||
|
Description: Re-set tabs
|
||
|
|
||
|
Clear all horizontal tab stops, then set tabs every Pn positions (i.e.
|
||
|
Esc-[->-5-g sets tabs every five columns)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>
|
||
|
Status: RBComm? private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ... h
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SM
|
||
|
Description: Set mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
SM causes the modes of the receiving device to be set as specified by
|
||
|
the parameter values.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
Private modes may be implemented using private parameters, see 5.4.1
|
||
|
and 7.4.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.2.125
|
||
|
|
||
|
[ NB: See "Mode:" entries for individual modes ]
|
||
|
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps i
|
||
|
Mnemonic: MC
|
||
|
Description: Media copy
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
MC is used either to initiate a transfer of data from or to an
|
||
|
auxiliary input/output device or to enable or disable the relay of the
|
||
|
received data stream to an auxiliary input/output device, depending on
|
||
|
the parameter value:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 initiate transfer to a primary auxiliary device
|
||
|
1 initiate transfer from a primary auxiliary device
|
||
|
2 initiate transfer to a secondary auxiliary device
|
||
|
3 initiate transfer from a secondary auxiliary device
|
||
|
4 stop relay to a primary auxiliary device
|
||
|
5 start relay to a primary auxiliary device
|
||
|
6 stop relay to a secondary auxiliary device
|
||
|
7 start relay to a secondary auxiliary device
|
||
|
|
||
|
This control function may not be used to switch on or off an auxiliary
|
||
|
device.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.82
|
||
|
|
||
|
Locator Controller Mode allows the host to communicate directly with
|
||
|
the locator device without terminal intervention (similar to printer
|
||
|
controller mode). When locator controller mode is set, all data
|
||
|
received at the host port is transferred directly to the locator port
|
||
|
without interpretation by the display terminal. The only exceptions
|
||
|
are the communications control characters XON/XOFF (if enabled), and
|
||
|
the control sequence to disabled locator controller mode. All
|
||
|
characters received at locator port are transferred to the host port
|
||
|
without interpretation. The host assumes full responsibility for the
|
||
|
locator device.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Locator controller mode is desirable for two reasons:
|
||
|
|
||
|
1. It allows the host to explicitly initialize or configure locator
|
||
|
devices. A foriegn locator device might not wake up in DEC format
|
||
|
for example.
|
||
|
|
||
|
2. It allows the locator port to be used for other auxilliary input
|
||
|
devices. A bar code reader could be interfaced to the locator port
|
||
|
for example, allowing the terminal to support a bar code reader
|
||
|
without pre-empting the printer port.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Turn off locator controller mode (MC) CSI 6 i
|
||
|
|
||
|
Turn on locator controller mode (MC) CSI 7 i
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
|
||
|
Status: standard; DEC modifications
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ? Ps i
|
||
|
|
||
|
?0 Select auxiliary port for ReGIS hardcopy output.
|
||
|
|
||
|
?1 copy the cursor line to
|
||
|
the auxilary(printer)Port
|
||
|
|
||
|
?2 Select computer port for ReGIS hardcopy output.
|
||
|
|
||
|
?3 copy the cursor line to
|
||
|
the modem(host) Port
|
||
|
|
||
|
?4 diaable the copy passthru
|
||
|
print mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
?5 enable the copy passthru
|
||
|
print mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC31
|
||
|
Status: Wyse/DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn j
|
||
|
Mnemonic: HPB
|
||
|
Description: Character position backward
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
HPB causes the active data position to be moved by n character
|
||
|
positions in the data component in the direction opposite to that of
|
||
|
the character progression, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.58
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn k
|
||
|
Mnemonic: VPB
|
||
|
Description: Line position backward
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
VPB causes the active data position to be moved by n line positions in
|
||
|
the data component in a direction opposite to that of the line
|
||
|
progression, where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.159
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn k
|
||
|
Description: disable (n=0) or enable (n=1) keyclick
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: termtypes.master 10.2.7
|
||
|
Status: iBCS2 private; clashes with ECMA-48 HPB
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ... l
|
||
|
Mnemonic: RM
|
||
|
Description: Reset mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
RM causes the modes of the receiving device to be reset as specified
|
||
|
by the parameter values.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
Private modes may be implemented using private parameters, see 5.4.1
|
||
|
and 7.4.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.106
|
||
|
|
||
|
[ see "Mode:" entries for individual modes ]
|
||
|
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = l
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CHC
|
||
|
Description: Clear and home cursor
|
||
|
|
||
|
Much like the Form Feed (FF) ASCII control character, this sequence
|
||
|
will erase the entire screen using the current fill attribute, but it
|
||
|
will ignore the current scrolling region if set (the entire screen is
|
||
|
always cleared, regardless of the scrolling region settings). The
|
||
|
cursor will be left at the top left of the scrolling region.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = ? l
|
||
|
Description: Insert line up
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: jaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals
|
||
|
<7t2fe1$gj0$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>
|
||
|
Status: ? private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ... m
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SGR
|
||
|
Description: Select graphic rendition
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SGR is used to establish one or more graphic rendition aspects for
|
||
|
subsequent text. The established aspects remain in effect until the
|
||
|
next occurrence of SGR in the data stream, depending on the setting of
|
||
|
the GRAPHIC RENDITION COMBINATION MODE (GRCM). Each graphic rendition
|
||
|
aspect is specified by a parameter value:
|
||
|
|
||
|
[ In the following list, items are marked with their source on the right.
|
||
|
Items with no marking are ECMA-48 standard ones. ]
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 default rendition (implementation-defined), cancels the effect of
|
||
|
any preceding occurrence of SGR in the data stream regardless of the
|
||
|
setting of the GRAPHIC RENDITION COMBINATION MODE (GRCM)
|
||
|
1 bold or increased intensity
|
||
|
2 faint, decreased intensity or second colour
|
||
|
2 Sets the normal colors. This sequence takes the
|
||
|
next two arguments as the foreground and background
|
||
|
color to set, respectively Uses SCO colour numbers. [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
3 italicized
|
||
|
3 If backwards compatibility mode is enabled, then this sequence is
|
||
|
used to control the role of the blink bit in the M6845
|
||
|
video controller. The argument following the 3
|
||
|
indicated whether this bit should be interpreted as
|
||
|
blink, or as bold background. For example, the
|
||
|
sequence CSI 3;1 m will enable blinking text, whereas
|
||
|
the sequence CSI 3;0 m will enable bright background
|
||
|
colors. [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
4 singly underlined
|
||
|
5 slowly blinking (less then 150 per minute)
|
||
|
6 rapidly blinking (150 per minute or more)
|
||
|
6 VGA only: if blink (5) is on, turn blink off and background color to
|
||
|
its light equivalent (that is, brown to yellow) [iBCS2]
|
||
|
6 steady (not blinking) [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
7 negative image
|
||
|
8 concealed characters
|
||
|
9 crossed-out (characters still legible but marked as to be deleted)
|
||
|
10 primary (default) font
|
||
|
10 reset selected mapping, display control flag, and toggle meta flag. [iBCS2]
|
||
|
11 first alternative font
|
||
|
11 select null mapping, set display control flag, reset toggle meta
|
||
|
flag. [iBCS2]
|
||
|
12 second alternative font
|
||
|
12 select null mapping, set display control flag, set toggle meta
|
||
|
flag. (The toggle meta flag causes the high bit of a byte to be
|
||
|
toggled before the mapping table translation is done.) [Linux]
|
||
|
13 third alternative font
|
||
|
14 fourth alternative font
|
||
|
15 fifth alternative font
|
||
|
16 sixth alternative font
|
||
|
17 seventh alternative font
|
||
|
18 eighth alternative font
|
||
|
19 ninth alternative font
|
||
|
20 Fraktur (Gothic)
|
||
|
21 doubly underlined
|
||
|
21 set normal intensity [Linux]
|
||
|
22 normal colour or normal intensity (neither bold nor faint)
|
||
|
23 not italicized, not fraktur
|
||
|
24 not underlined (neither singly nor doubly)
|
||
|
25 steady (not blinking)
|
||
|
26 (reserved for proportional spacing as specified in CCITT
|
||
|
Recommendation T.61)
|
||
|
27 positive image
|
||
|
28 revealed characters
|
||
|
29 not crossed out
|
||
|
30 black display
|
||
|
31 red display
|
||
|
32 green display
|
||
|
33 yellow display
|
||
|
34 blue display
|
||
|
35 magenta display
|
||
|
36 cyan display
|
||
|
37 white display
|
||
|
38 (reserved for future standardization; intended for setting
|
||
|
character foreground colour as specified in ISO 8613-6 [CCITT
|
||
|
Recommendation T.416])
|
||
|
38 set underscore on, set default foreground color [Linux]
|
||
|
38 If next two parameters are 5 and Ps, set foreground color to Ps [xterm]
|
||
|
38 enables underline option; white foreground with white underscore [iBCS2]
|
||
|
39 default display colour (implementation-defined)
|
||
|
39 disables underline option [iBCS2]
|
||
|
40 black background
|
||
|
41 red background
|
||
|
42 green background
|
||
|
43 yellow background
|
||
|
44 blue background
|
||
|
45 magenta background
|
||
|
46 cyan background
|
||
|
47 white background
|
||
|
48 (reserved for future standardization; intended for setting
|
||
|
character background colour as specified in ISO 8613-6 [CCITT
|
||
|
Recommendation T.416])
|
||
|
48 If next two parameters are 5 and Ps, set background color to Ps [xterm]
|
||
|
49 default background colour (implementation-defined)
|
||
|
50 (reserved for cancelling the effect of the rendering aspect
|
||
|
established by parameter value 26)
|
||
|
50 Reset to the original color pair [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
51 framed
|
||
|
51 Reset all colors to the system default [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
52 encircled
|
||
|
53 overlined
|
||
|
54 not framed, not encircled
|
||
|
55 not overlined
|
||
|
56 (reserved for future standardization)
|
||
|
57 (reserved for future standardization)
|
||
|
58 (reserved for future standardization)
|
||
|
59 (reserved for future standardization)
|
||
|
60 ideogram underline or right side line
|
||
|
61 ideogram double underline or double line on the right side
|
||
|
62 ideogram overline or left side line
|
||
|
63 ideogram double overline or double line on the left side
|
||
|
64 ideogram stress marking
|
||
|
65 cancels the effect of the rendition aspects established by
|
||
|
parameter values 60 to 64
|
||
|
90 Set foreground color to (bright) Black [aixterm]
|
||
|
91 Set foreground color to (bright) Red [aixterm]
|
||
|
92 Set foreground color to (bright) Green [aixterm]
|
||
|
93 Set foreground color to (bright) Yellow [aixterm]
|
||
|
94 Set foreground color to (bright) Blue [aixterm]
|
||
|
95 Set foreground color to (bright) Magenta [aixterm]
|
||
|
96 Set foreground color to (bright) Cyan [aixterm]
|
||
|
97 Set foreground color to (bright) White [aixterm]
|
||
|
|
||
|
90 Set foreground color to (bright) Black [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
91 Set foreground color to (bright) Blue [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
92 Set foreground color to (bright) Green [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
93 Set foreground color to (bright) Cyan [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
94 Set foreground color to (bright) Red [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
95 Set foreground color to (bright) Magenta [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
96 Set foreground color to (bright) Yellow [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
97 Set foreground color to (bright) White [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
|
||
|
100 Set foreground and background color to default [rxvt]
|
||
|
100 Set background color to (bright) Black [aixterm]
|
||
|
101 Set background color to (bright) Red [aixterm]
|
||
|
102 Set background color to (bright) Green [aixterm]
|
||
|
103 Set background color to (bright) Yellow [aixterm]
|
||
|
104 Set background color to (bright) Blue [aixterm]
|
||
|
105 Set background color to (bright) Magenta [aixterm]
|
||
|
106 Set background color to (bright) Cyan [aixterm]
|
||
|
107 Set background color to (bright) White [aixterm]
|
||
|
|
||
|
100 Set background color to (bright) Black [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
101 Set background color to (bright) Blue [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
102 Set background color to (bright) Green [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
103 Set background color to (bright) Cyan [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
104 Set background color to (bright) Red [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
105 Set background color to (bright) Magenta [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
106 Set background color to (bright) Yellow [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
107 Set background color to (bright) White [SCOANSI]
|
||
|
|
||
|
DEC private SGRs:
|
||
|
?1 Set secondary overprint mode [LQP02]
|
||
|
?2 Enable shadow print [LQP02]
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
The usable combinations of parameter values are determined by the
|
||
|
implementation.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.118
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Source: termtypes.master 10.2.7
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.52 2004/04/18 15:18:48
|
||
|
Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: standard; Linux, iBCS2, aixterm extensions
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = Ps ; Pn m
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SSM
|
||
|
Description: Set specific margin
|
||
|
|
||
|
This sequence can be used to set any one of the 4 margins. Parameter
|
||
|
Ps indicates which margin to set (Ps=0 for the top margin, Ps=1 for
|
||
|
the bottom, Ps=2 for the left and Ps=3 for the right). Pn is the row
|
||
|
or column to set the margin to. If after this control sequence has
|
||
|
been processed, the top or bottom margins are not at the top of the
|
||
|
screen, and the left and right margins are at the screen boundary,
|
||
|
then the scrolling region is set to the size specified. If either of
|
||
|
the left or right margins are not at the screen boundary then the
|
||
|
scrolling region is bound by the current margins.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ? = m
|
||
|
Description: Delete line down
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: jaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals
|
||
|
<7t2fe1$gj0$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>
|
||
|
Status: ? private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps n
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DSR
|
||
|
Description: Device status report
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
DSR is used either to report the status of the sending device or to
|
||
|
request a status report from the receiving device, depending on the
|
||
|
parameter values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 ready, no malfunction detected
|
||
|
1 busy, another DSR must be requested later
|
||
|
2 busy, another DSR will be sent later
|
||
|
3 some malfunction detected, another DSR must be requested later
|
||
|
4 some malfunction detected, another DSR will be sent later
|
||
|
5 a DSR is requested
|
||
|
6 a report of the active presentation position or of the active data
|
||
|
position in the form of ACTIVE POSITION REPORT (CPR) is requested
|
||
|
|
||
|
DSR with parameter value 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 may be sent either
|
||
|
unsolicited or as a response to a request such as a DSR with a
|
||
|
parameter value 5 or MESSAGE WAITING (MW).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.35
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
|
||
|
100-107
|
||
|
|
||
|
Report the rgb value (#rrggbb) for a given color using a DCS Pn .y Ps
|
||
|
ST escape sequence (see DCS below for the values that xwsh will use
|
||
|
for Pn). DSR parameter 100 maps to the text color, 101 to the page
|
||
|
color, 102 the selection text color, 103 to the selection page color,
|
||
|
104 to the cursor text color, 105 to the cursor page color, 106 to the
|
||
|
half intensity color and 107 to the bold color.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
|
||
|
Status: SGI private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ? Pn n
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DSR
|
||
|
Description: Device status report
|
||
|
|
||
|
Request CSI ? 1 n [LA50] disable all unsolicited status reports.
|
||
|
Request CSI ? 2 n [LA50] enable unsolicited brief reports and
|
||
|
send an extended one.
|
||
|
Request CSI ? 3 n [LA50] enable unsolicited extended reports and
|
||
|
send one.
|
||
|
Response CSI ? 20 n malfunction detected [also LCP01]
|
||
|
then CSI ? Ps ... n
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps Fault
|
||
|
21 Hardware failure
|
||
|
22 Communication failure (event)
|
||
|
23 Input buffer overflow (event)
|
||
|
24 Printer deselected
|
||
|
26 Cover open
|
||
|
27 Out of consumables (ink/paper)
|
||
|
28 Program load failure
|
||
|
42 Font load failure
|
||
|
44 Font memory exceeded
|
||
|
104 Too many fonts
|
||
|
|
||
|
Request CSI ? 6 n same as CSI 6 n but for VT340s
|
||
|
|
||
|
Request CSI ? 15 n printer status
|
||
|
Response CSI ? 10 n printer ready
|
||
|
or CSI ? 11 n printer is not ready
|
||
|
or CSI ? 13 n no printer
|
||
|
or CSI ? 19 n printer assigned to other session
|
||
|
|
||
|
Request CSI ? 25 n User Definable Key status
|
||
|
Response CSI ? 20 n UDKs are unlocked
|
||
|
or CSI ? 21 n UDKs are locked
|
||
|
|
||
|
Request CSI ? 26 n keyboard dialect
|
||
|
Response CSI ? 27; Ps n in MS Kermit this is controlled by
|
||
|
command SET TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET <country>
|
||
|
Ps Country Ps Country
|
||
|
1 North American/ASCII
|
||
|
2 British
|
||
|
3 Flemish
|
||
|
4 French Canadian
|
||
|
5 Danish
|
||
|
6 Finnish
|
||
|
7 German
|
||
|
8 Dutch
|
||
|
9 Italian
|
||
|
10 Swiss (French)
|
||
|
11 Swiss (German)
|
||
|
12 Swedish
|
||
|
13 Norwegian/Danish
|
||
|
14 Hebrew
|
||
|
14 French
|
||
|
15 Spanish
|
||
|
16 Portugese
|
||
|
|
||
|
Request CSI ? 55 n locator status
|
||
|
Response CSI ? 53 n no locator
|
||
|
or CSI ? 50 n locator ready
|
||
|
or CSI ? 58 n locator busy
|
||
|
|
||
|
Request CSI ? 56 n locator type
|
||
|
Response CSI ? 57 Ps n Ps = 0 => No locator
|
||
|
Ps = 1 => Locator is a mouse
|
||
|
|
||
|
Request CSI ? 63 ; Pn n Request checksum of macro definitions
|
||
|
Pn is returned with DECCKSR
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/msvibm_vt.txt>
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/swedish_vt102_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990712 vt220.c
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppE84,E124
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT200
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ... o
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DAQ
|
||
|
Description: Define area qualification
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
DAQ is used to indicate that the active presentation position in the
|
||
|
presentation component is the first character position of a qualified
|
||
|
area. The last character position of the qualified area is the
|
||
|
character position in the presentation component immediately preceding
|
||
|
the first character position of the following qualified area.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The parameter value designates the type of qualified area:
|
||
|
0 unprotected and unguarded
|
||
|
1 protected and guarded
|
||
|
2 graphic character input
|
||
|
3 numeric input
|
||
|
4 alphabetic input
|
||
|
5 input aligned on the last character position of the qualified area
|
||
|
6 fill with ZEROs
|
||
|
7 set a character tabulation stop at the active presentation position
|
||
|
(the first character position of the qualified area) to indicate the
|
||
|
beginning of a field
|
||
|
8 protected and unguarded
|
||
|
9 fill with SPACEs
|
||
|
10 input aligned on the first character position of the qualified area
|
||
|
11 the order of the character positions in the input field is
|
||
|
reversed, i.e. the last position in each line becomes the first and
|
||
|
vice versa; input begins at the new first position.
|
||
|
|
||
|
This control function operates independently of the setting of the
|
||
|
TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM). The character tabulation stop set by
|
||
|
parameter value 7 applies to the active line only.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
|
||
|
should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.25
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI p
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SUNBOW
|
||
|
Description: Black on white
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets the display into black-on-white mode (the default).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) [paraphrased]
|
||
|
Status: Sun private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps p
|
||
|
Description: Begin field attribute
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps is a variable representing
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps =0 normal
|
||
|
1 dim
|
||
|
2 blink
|
||
|
3 blink dim
|
||
|
4 blank
|
||
|
5 blank dim
|
||
|
6 blank
|
||
|
7 blank dim
|
||
|
8 underline
|
||
|
9 underline dim
|
||
|
10 underline blink
|
||
|
11 underline blink dim
|
||
|
12 underline blank
|
||
|
13 underline blank dim
|
||
|
14 Underline blank blink
|
||
|
15 underline blank blink dim
|
||
|
16 Inverse
|
||
|
17 inverse dim
|
||
|
18 inverse blink
|
||
|
19 Inverse blink dim
|
||
|
20 inverse blank
|
||
|
21 inverse blank dim
|
||
|
22 inverse blank
|
||
|
23 inverse blank dim
|
||
|
24 inverse underline
|
||
|
25 inverse underline dim
|
||
|
26 inverse underline blink
|
||
|
27 inverse underline blink
|
||
|
dim
|
||
|
28 inverse underline blank
|
||
|
29 inverse underline blank
|
||
|
dim
|
||
|
30 inverse underline blank
|
||
|
blink
|
||
|
31 inverse underline blank
|
||
|
blink di
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private?
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps q
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECLL
|
||
|
Description: Load LEDs
|
||
|
|
||
|
Load the four programmable LEDs on the keyboard according to the
|
||
|
parameter(s).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter Meaning
|
||
|
-----------------------
|
||
|
0 Clear All LEDs (default)
|
||
|
1 Light L1
|
||
|
2 Light L2
|
||
|
3 Light L3
|
||
|
4 Light L4
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
|
||
|
ESC [ 0 q: clear all LEDs
|
||
|
ESC [ 1 q: set Scroll Lock LED
|
||
|
ESC [ 2 q: set Num Lock LED
|
||
|
ESC [ 3 q: set Caps Lock LED
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI q
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SUNWOB
|
||
|
Description: White on black
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets the display to white-on-black mode.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) [paraphrased]
|
||
|
Status: Sun private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pt ; Pb r
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSTBM
|
||
|
Description: Set top and bottom margins
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pt is the number of the top line of the scrolling region;
|
||
|
Pb is the number of the bottom line of the scrolling region
|
||
|
and must be greater than Pt.
|
||
|
(The default for Pt is line 1, the default for Pb is the end
|
||
|
of the screen)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 r
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CSR
|
||
|
Description: Change Scrolling Region
|
||
|
|
||
|
Where 3 or more parameters are specified, the parameters are the top,
|
||
|
bottom, left and right margins respectively. If you omit the last
|
||
|
parameter, the extreme edge of the screen is assumed to be the right
|
||
|
margin.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If any of the parameters are out of bounds, they are clipped. If any
|
||
|
of the parameters would cause an overlap (i.e. the bottom margin is
|
||
|
higher than the top margin, or the right margin is less that the left
|
||
|
margin), then this command is ignored and no scrolling region or
|
||
|
window will be active. If all of the parameters are correct, then the
|
||
|
cursor is moved to the top left hand corner of the newly-created
|
||
|
region. The new region will now define the bounds of all scroll and
|
||
|
cursor motion operations.
|
||
|
|
||
|
[ If only two parameters are specified, this behaves as DECSTBM ]
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn r
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SUNSCRL
|
||
|
Description: Set scrolling
|
||
|
|
||
|
Default parameter: Pn = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
If Pn > 0, sets the screen to scroll Pn lines whenever a LF would push
|
||
|
the cursor off the bottom. Setting it to the number of lines on the
|
||
|
screen causes the screen to clear when it fills.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If Pn == 0, sets "wrap mode", where the cursor moves back to the top
|
||
|
line of the screen when LFed off the bottom, and where lines are
|
||
|
cleared when the cursor LFs into them.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) [paraphrased]
|
||
|
Status: Sun private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = r
|
||
|
Mnemonic: RSM
|
||
|
Description: Reset margins
|
||
|
|
||
|
This sequence can be used to reset all of the margins to cover the
|
||
|
entire screen. This will deactivate the scrolling region (if
|
||
|
defined). If not, this sequence has no effect. The cursor is not
|
||
|
moved.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ? Ps r
|
||
|
Description: Restore DEC Private Mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps = 1 -> Normal/Application Cursor Keys (DECCKM)
|
||
|
Ps = 3 -> 80/132 Column Mode (DECCOLM)
|
||
|
Ps = 4 -> Jump (Fast)/Smooth (Slow) Scroll (DECSCLM)
|
||
|
Ps = 5 -> Normal/Reverse Video (DECSCNM)
|
||
|
Ps = 6 -> Normal/Origin Cursor Mode (DECOM)
|
||
|
Ps = 7 -> No Wraparound/Wraparound Mode (DECAWM)
|
||
|
Ps = 8 -> Auto-repeat/No Auto-repeat Keys (DECARM)
|
||
|
Ps = 9 -> Don't Send/Send MIT Mouse Row & Column on
|
||
|
Button Press
|
||
|
Ps = 40 -> Disallow/Allow 80 <-> 132 Mode
|
||
|
Ps = 41 -> Off/On curses(5) fix
|
||
|
Ps = 44 -> Turn Off/On Margin Bell
|
||
|
Ps = 45 -> No Reverse-wraparound/Reverse-wraparound
|
||
|
Mode
|
||
|
Ps = 46 -> Stop/Start Logging
|
||
|
Ps = 47 -> Use Normal/Alternate Screen Buffer
|
||
|
Ps = 1000 -> mouse bogus sequence (???)
|
||
|
Ps = 1001 -> mouse bogus sequence (???)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/xterm_controls.txt>
|
||
|
Status: xterm? private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 s
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSLRM
|
||
|
Description: Set left and right margins
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets left margin to Pn1, right margin to Pn2
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE10
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400, printers
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI s
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SCP
|
||
|
Description: Save cursor position
|
||
|
|
||
|
Save the current cursor position. The cursor position can be restored
|
||
|
later using the RCP sequence.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI s
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SUNRESET
|
||
|
Description: Reset terminal emulator
|
||
|
|
||
|
Resets modes and font. Doesn't move cursor or change screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) [paraphrased]
|
||
|
Status: Sun private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ? Ps s
|
||
|
Description: Save DEC Private Mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps = 1 -> Normal/Application Cursor Keys (DECCKM)
|
||
|
Ps = 3 -> 80/132 Column Mode (DECCOLM)
|
||
|
Ps = 4 -> Jump (Fast)/Smooth (Slow) Scroll (DECSCLM)
|
||
|
Ps = 5 -> Normal/Reverse Video (DECSCNM)
|
||
|
Ps = 6 -> Normal/Origin Cursor Mode (DECOM)
|
||
|
Ps = 7 -> No Wraparound/Wraparound Mode (DECAWM)
|
||
|
Ps = 8 -> Auto-repeat/No Auto-repeat Keys (DECARM)
|
||
|
Ps = 9 -> Don't Send/Send MIT Mouse Row & Column on
|
||
|
Button Press
|
||
|
Ps = 40 -> Disallow/Allow 80 <-> 132 Mode
|
||
|
Ps = 41 -> Off/On curses(5) fix
|
||
|
Ps = 44 -> Turn Off/On Margin Bell
|
||
|
Ps = 45 -> No Reverse-wraparound/Reverse-wraparound
|
||
|
Mode
|
||
|
Ps = 46 -> Stop/Start Logging
|
||
|
Ps = 47 -> Use Normal/Alternate Screen Buffer
|
||
|
Ps = 1000 -> mouse bogus sequence (???)
|
||
|
Ps = 1001 -> mouse bogus sequence (???)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/xterm_controls.txt>
|
||
|
Status: xterm? private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn t
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSLPP
|
||
|
Description: Set lines per physical page
|
||
|
|
||
|
On the multipage VT330, you can issue a DECSLPP (set lines per page) command:
|
||
|
|
||
|
Esc [ 2 4 t 6 pages of 24 lines each, single session
|
||
|
Esc [ 3 6 t 4 pages of 36 lines each, single session
|
||
|
Esc [ 7 2 t 2 pages of 72 lines each, single session
|
||
|
Esc [ 1 4 4 t 1 page of 144 lines each, single session
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
|
||
|
On LA100:
|
||
|
Sets form length to Pn lines. Sets top margin and active line to line
|
||
|
one. Sets bottom margin to line Pn. Default is 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE10
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT330, printers
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps t
|
||
|
Description: Define non-normal (enhance) attribute
|
||
|
|
||
|
[setup level 1]
|
||
|
|
||
|
Defines the enhance attribute
|
||
|
(see SGR,Non-0)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps = 0 dim
|
||
|
1 inverse
|
||
|
2 underline
|
||
|
|
||
|
[ On a Wyse-75, this chooses which attribute SGR with a non-zero argument
|
||
|
produces. ]
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
|
||
|
Status: Wyse private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn ... u
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSHTS
|
||
|
Description: Set horizontal tab stops
|
||
|
|
||
|
Sets horizontal tab stops at the given values for Pn (up to 16 for the
|
||
|
LA100).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE10
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; printers
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI u
|
||
|
Mnemonic: RCP
|
||
|
Description: Restore cursor position
|
||
|
|
||
|
Restore the cursor to the position it occupied at the last time an SCP
|
||
|
sequence was received.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn ... v
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSVTS
|
||
|
Description: Set vertical tab stops
|
||
|
|
||
|
Set vertical tab stops at lines Pn ... (up to 16 on LA100)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE11
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; printers
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps w
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSHORP
|
||
|
Description: Set horizontal pitch
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps =
|
||
|
0 10.0 cpi, 80 cpl
|
||
|
1 10.0 cpi, 80 cpl
|
||
|
2 12.0 cpi, 96 cpl
|
||
|
3 13.2 cpi
|
||
|
4 16.5 cpi, 132 cpl
|
||
|
5 5.0 cpi
|
||
|
6 6.0 cpi
|
||
|
7 6.6 cpi
|
||
|
8 8.25 cpi
|
||
|
9 15.0 cpi
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE108
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; printers
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps x
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECREQTPARM
|
||
|
Description: Request terminal parameters
|
||
|
|
||
|
The host sends this sequence to request the VT100 to send a DECREPTPARM
|
||
|
sequence back. {Ps} can be either 0 or 1. If 0, the terminal will be
|
||
|
allowed to send unsolicited DECREPTPARMs. These reports will be
|
||
|
generated each time the terminal exits the SET-UP mode. If {Ps} is 1,
|
||
|
then the terminal will only generate DECREPTPARMs in response to a
|
||
|
request.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Psol ; Ppar ; Pnbits ; Pxspd ; Prspd ; Pcmul ; Pflags x
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECREPTPARM
|
||
|
Description: Report terminal parameters
|
||
|
|
||
|
This sequence is generated by the VT100 to notify the host of the
|
||
|
status of selected terminal parameters. The status sequence may be
|
||
|
sent when requested by the host (via DECREQTPARM) or at the terminal's
|
||
|
discretion. On power up or reset, the VT100 is inhibited from sending
|
||
|
unsolicited reports.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The meanings of the sequence paramters are:
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter Value Meaning
|
||
|
------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
{sol} 1 This message is a report.
|
||
|
2 This message is a report, and the terminal is
|
||
|
only reporting on request.
|
||
|
|
||
|
{par} 1 No parity set
|
||
|
4 Parity set and odd
|
||
|
5 Parity set and even
|
||
|
|
||
|
{nbits} 1 8 bits per character
|
||
|
2 7 bits per character
|
||
|
|
||
|
{xspd} 0 Speed set to 50 bps
|
||
|
-and- 8 Speed set to 75 bps
|
||
|
{rspd} 16 Speed set to 110 bps
|
||
|
24 Speed set to 134.5 bps
|
||
|
{xspd}= 32 Speed set to 150 bps
|
||
|
Transmit 40 Speed set to 200 bps
|
||
|
Speed 48 Speed set to 300 bps
|
||
|
56 Speed set to 600 bps
|
||
|
{rspd}= 64 Speed set to 1200 bps
|
||
|
Recieve 72 Speed set to 1800 bps
|
||
|
Speed 80 Speed set to 2000 bps
|
||
|
88 Speed set to 2400 bps
|
||
|
96 Speed set to 3600 bps
|
||
|
104 Speed set to 4800 bps
|
||
|
112 Speed set to 9600 bps
|
||
|
120 Speed set to 19200 bps
|
||
|
128 Speed set to 38400 bps [VT220?]
|
||
|
136 Speed set to 57600 bps [RBComm]
|
||
|
144 Speed set to 115200 bps [RBComm]
|
||
|
|
||
|
{cmul} 1 The bit rate multiplier is 16
|
||
|
|
||
|
{flags} 0-15 This value communicates the four switch values
|
||
|
in block 5 of SET-UP B, which are only visible
|
||
|
to the user when an STP option is installed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990712 reports.c
|
||
|
Source: <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI x
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DGRTC
|
||
|
Description: Read terminal configuration
|
||
|
|
||
|
This command queries for terminal configuration information, such as
|
||
|
model ID, keyboard type, etc.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Terminal configuration is sent back in the following form:
|
||
|
|
||
|
CSI <model ID> ; <status> ; <firmware rev> <keyboard> x
|
||
|
|
||
|
where:
|
||
|
|
||
|
<model ID> = 52
|
||
|
|
||
|
<status> = 00--15
|
||
|
|
||
|
<firmware rev> = 0--7
|
||
|
|
||
|
<keyboard> is one of:
|
||
|
00: No keyboard
|
||
|
19: Swiss/French
|
||
|
20: Swiss/German
|
||
|
21: Canadian/English
|
||
|
22: Kata Kana
|
||
|
24: Canadian/French
|
||
|
25: United States
|
||
|
26: United Kingdom
|
||
|
27: French
|
||
|
28: German
|
||
|
29: Swedish/Finnish
|
||
|
30: Spanish
|
||
|
31: Danish/Norwegian
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
|
||
|
<URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
|
||
|
Status: Data General private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Ps2 y
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECTST
|
||
|
Description: Invoke confidence test
|
||
|
|
||
|
If Ps1 == 2 [VT100]
|
||
|
Ps2 is the parameter indicating the test to be done. It is computed by
|
||
|
taking the weight indicated for each desired test and adding them
|
||
|
together. If Ps2 is 0, no test is performed but the VT100 is reset.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Test Weight
|
||
|
--------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
POST (ROM checksum, RAM NVR, keyboardm and AVO) 1
|
||
|
Data Loop Back (Loopback connector required) 2
|
||
|
EIA Modem Control Test (Loopback connector req.) 4
|
||
|
Repeat Testing until failure 8
|
||
|
Printer loopback test 16
|
||
|
|
||
|
If Ps1 == 6 [LCP01]
|
||
|
Ps2 = 1 Powerup self-tests
|
||
|
Ps2 = 2 Print a test pattern
|
||
|
|
||
|
If Ps1 == 4, Ps2 == 1 [VT125]
|
||
|
Further Ps parameters are tests to carry out:
|
||
|
1 VT125 power-up test
|
||
|
2 VT125 computer port data loopback test
|
||
|
3 VT125 auxiliary port data loopback test
|
||
|
4 VT125 display test
|
||
|
5 VT125 video bitmap memory test
|
||
|
9 Repeat selected tests continuously until power-off or failure
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/swedish_vt102_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppC32,E124
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps z
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECVERP
|
||
|
Description: Set vertical pitch
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps =
|
||
|
0 6 lpi, 63 lpp
|
||
|
1 6 lpi, 63 lpp
|
||
|
2 8 lpi, 84 lpp
|
||
|
3 12 lpi, 125 lpp
|
||
|
4 2 lpi, 21 lpp
|
||
|
5 3 lpi, 32 lpp
|
||
|
6 4 lpi, 42 lpp
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; printers
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn z
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SSW
|
||
|
Description: Screen switch
|
||
|
|
||
|
Make the multiscreen number specified by parameter Pn the current one.
|
||
|
If Pn refers to an invalid multiscreen number, no action is taken.
|
||
|
|
||
|
[ "Multiscreen" seems to be SCOish for "virtual console" ]
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI = z
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CAT
|
||
|
Description: Clear all tabs
|
||
|
|
||
|
Clear all tab stops.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
|
||
|
Status: SCO private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps |
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECTTC
|
||
|
Description: Select transmit termination character
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps Meaning
|
||
|
0 function disabled
|
||
|
1 Form Feed, FF
|
||
|
2 End of Text, ETX
|
||
|
3 End of Transmission, EOT
|
||
|
4 Carriage Return, CR
|
||
|
5 Device Control 3, DC3
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC27
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT131 only
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps }
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECPRO
|
||
|
Description: Set protected field attributes
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps Meaning
|
||
|
0 no protection
|
||
|
1 bold protection
|
||
|
4 underline protection
|
||
|
5 blink protection
|
||
|
7 reverse video protection
|
||
|
254 all attributes off protection
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC27
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT131 only
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP @
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SL
|
||
|
Description: Scroll left
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
SL causes the data in the presentation component to be moved by n
|
||
|
character positions if the line orientation is horizontal, or by n
|
||
|
line positions if the line orientation is vertical, such that the data
|
||
|
appear to move to the left; where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The active presentation position is not affected by this control function.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.121
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP A
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SR
|
||
|
Description: Scroll right
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
SR causes the data in the presentation component to be moved by n
|
||
|
character positions if the line orientation is horizontal, or by n
|
||
|
line positions if the line orientation is vertical, such that the data
|
||
|
appear to move to the right; where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The active presentation position is not affected by this control
|
||
|
function.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.135
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 SP B
|
||
|
Mnemonic: GSM
|
||
|
Description: Graphic size modification
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default values: Pn1 = 100; Pn2 = 100
|
||
|
|
||
|
GSM is used to modify for subsequent text the height and/or the width
|
||
|
of all primary and alternative fonts identified by FONT SELECTION
|
||
|
(FNT) and established by GRAPHIC SIZE SELECTION (GSS). The
|
||
|
established values remain in effect until the next occurrence of GSM
|
||
|
or GSS in the data steam.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn1 specifies the height as a percentage of the height established by GSS
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn2 specifies the width as a percentage of the width established by GSS
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.55
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP C
|
||
|
Mnemonic: GSS
|
||
|
Description: Graphic size selection
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
GSS is used to establish for subsequent text the height and the width
|
||
|
of all primary and alternative fonts identified by FONT SELECTION
|
||
|
(FNT). The established values remain in effect until the next
|
||
|
occurrence of GSS in the data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn specifies the height, the width is implicitly defined by the
|
||
|
height.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established
|
||
|
by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.56
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP D
|
||
|
Mnemonic: FNT
|
||
|
Description: Font selection
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default values: Ps1 = 0; Ps2 =0
|
||
|
|
||
|
FNT is used to identify the character font to be selected as primary
|
||
|
or alternative font by subsequent occurrences of SELECT GRAPHIC
|
||
|
RENDITION (SGR) in the data stream. Ps1 specifies the primary or
|
||
|
alternative font concerned:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 primary font
|
||
|
1 first alternative font
|
||
|
2 second alternative font
|
||
|
3 third alternative font
|
||
|
4 fourth alternative font
|
||
|
5 fifth alternative font
|
||
|
6 sixth alternative font
|
||
|
7 seventh alternative font
|
||
|
8 eighth alternative font
|
||
|
9 ninth alternative font
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps2 identifies the character font according to a register which is to
|
||
|
be established.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.53
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP E
|
||
|
Mnemonic: TSS
|
||
|
Description: Thin space specification
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
TSS is used to establish the width of a thin space for subsequent
|
||
|
text. The established width remains in effect until the next
|
||
|
occurrence of TSS in the data stream, see annex C.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn specifies the width of the thin space.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established
|
||
|
by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.157
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ... SP F
|
||
|
Mnemonic: JFY
|
||
|
Description: Justify
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
JFY is used to indicate the beginning of a string of graphic
|
||
|
characters in the presentation component that are to be justified
|
||
|
according to the layout specified by the parameter values, see
|
||
|
annex C:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 no justification, end of justification of preceding text
|
||
|
1 word fill
|
||
|
2 word space
|
||
|
3 letter space
|
||
|
4 hyphenation
|
||
|
5 flush to line home position margin
|
||
|
6 centre between line home position and line limit position margins
|
||
|
7 flush to line limit position margin
|
||
|
8 Italian hyphenation
|
||
|
|
||
|
The end of the string to be justified is indicated by the next
|
||
|
occurrence of JFY in the data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET
|
||
|
LINE HOME (SLH). The line limit position is established by the
|
||
|
parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.73
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 SP G
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SPI
|
||
|
Description: Spacing increment
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default values.
|
||
|
|
||
|
SPI is used to establish the line spacing and the character spacing
|
||
|
for subsequent text. The established line spacing remains in effect
|
||
|
until the next occurrence of SPI or of SET LINE SPACING (SLS) or of
|
||
|
SELECT LINE SPACING (SVS) in the data stream. The established
|
||
|
character spacing remains in effect until the next occurrence of SET
|
||
|
CHARACTER SPACING (SCS) or of SELECT CHARACTER SPACING (SHS) in the
|
||
|
data stream, see annex C.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn1 specifies the line spacing
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn2 specifies the character spacing
|
||
|
|
||
|
The unit in which the parameter values are expressed is that
|
||
|
established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.132
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn ... SP H
|
||
|
Mnemonic: QUAD
|
||
|
Description: Quad
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
QUAD is used to indicate the end of a string of graphic characters
|
||
|
that are to be positioned on a single line according to the layout
|
||
|
specified by the parameter values, see annex C:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 flush to line home position margin
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 flush to line home position margin and fill with leader
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 centre between line home position and line limit position margins
|
||
|
|
||
|
3 centre between line home position and line limit position margins
|
||
|
and fill with leader
|
||
|
|
||
|
4 flush to line limit position margin
|
||
|
|
||
|
5 flush to line limit position margin and fill with leader
|
||
|
|
||
|
6 flush to both margins
|
||
|
|
||
|
The beginning of the string to be positioned is indicated by the
|
||
|
preceding occurrence in the data stream of either QUAD or one of the
|
||
|
following formator functions: FORM FEED (FF), CHARACTER AND LINE
|
||
|
POSITION (HVP), LINE FEED (LF), NEXT LINE (NEL), PAGE POSITION
|
||
|
ABSOLUTE (PPA), PAGE POSITION BACKWARD (PPB), PAGE POSITION FORWARD
|
||
|
(PPR), REVERSE LINE FEED (RI), LINE POSITION ABSOLUTE (VPA), LINE
|
||
|
POSITION BACKWARD (VPB), LINE POSITION FORWARD (VPR), or LINE
|
||
|
TABULATION (VT).
|
||
|
|
||
|
The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET
|
||
|
LINE HOME (SLH). The line limit position is established by the
|
||
|
parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.102
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps SP I
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SSU
|
||
|
Description: Select size unit
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SSU is used to establish the unit in which the numeric parameters of
|
||
|
certain control functions are expressed. The established unit remains
|
||
|
in effect until the next occurrence of SSU in the data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The parameter values are
|
||
|
0 CHARACTER - The dimensions of this unit are device-dependent
|
||
|
1 MILLIMETRE
|
||
|
2 COMPUTER DECIPOINT - 0,035 28 mm (1/720 of 25,4 mm)
|
||
|
3 DECIDIDOT - 0,037 59 mm (10/266 mm)
|
||
|
4 MIL - 0,025 4 mm (1/1 000 of 25,4 mm)
|
||
|
5 BASIC MEASURING UNIT (BMU) - 0,021 17 mm (1/1 200 of 25,4 mm)
|
||
|
6 MICROMETRE - 0,001 mm
|
||
|
7 PIXEL - The smallest increment that can be specified in a device
|
||
|
8 DECIPOINT - 0,035 14 mm (35/996 mm)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.139
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps SP J
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PFS
|
||
|
Description: Page format selection
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
PFS is used to establish the available area for the imaging of pages
|
||
|
of text based on paper size. The pages are introduced by the
|
||
|
subsequent occurrence of FORM FEED (FF) in the data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The established image area remains in effect until the next occurrence
|
||
|
of PFS in the data stream. The parameter values are (see also
|
||
|
annex E):
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 tall basic text communication format
|
||
|
1 wide basic text communication format
|
||
|
2 tall basic A4 format
|
||
|
3 wide basic A4 format
|
||
|
4 tall North American letter format
|
||
|
5 wide North American letter format
|
||
|
6 tall extended A4 format
|
||
|
7 wide extended A4 format
|
||
|
8 tall North American legal format
|
||
|
9 wide North American legal format
|
||
|
10 A4 short lines format
|
||
|
11 A4 long lines format
|
||
|
12 B5 short lines format
|
||
|
13 B5 long lines format
|
||
|
14 B4 short lines format
|
||
|
15 B4 long lines format
|
||
|
|
||
|
The page home position is established by the parameter value of SET
|
||
|
PAGE HOME (SPH), the page limit position is established by the
|
||
|
parameter value of SET PAGE LIMIT (SPL).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.91
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ? Ps SP J
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PFS
|
||
|
Description: Page format selection (DEC extensions)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps Paper size
|
||
|
20 Tall extended North American letter format
|
||
|
21 Wide extended North Americal letter format
|
||
|
22 Tall extended A4 format
|
||
|
23 Wide extended A4 format
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE110
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LN03
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps SP K
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SHS
|
||
|
Description: Select character spacing
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SHS is used to establish the character spacing for subsequent
|
||
|
text. The established spacing remains in effect until the next
|
||
|
occurrence of SHS or of SET CHARACTER SPACING (SCS) or of SPACING
|
||
|
INCREMENT (SPI) in the data stream. The parameter values are
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 10 characters per 25,4 mm
|
||
|
1 12 characters per 25,4 mm
|
||
|
2 15 characters per 25,4 mm
|
||
|
3 6 characters per 25,4 mm
|
||
|
4 3 characters per 25,4 mm
|
||
|
5 9 characters per 50,8 mm
|
||
|
6 4 characters per 25,4 mm
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.118
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps SP L
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SVS
|
||
|
Description: Select line spacing
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SVS is used to establish the line spacing for subsequent text. The
|
||
|
established spacing remains in effect until the next occurrence of SVS
|
||
|
or of SET LINE SPACING (SLS) or of SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the data
|
||
|
stream. The parameter values are:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 6 lines per 25,4 mm
|
||
|
1 4 lines per 25,4 mm
|
||
|
2 3 lines per 25,4 mm
|
||
|
3 12 lines per 25,4 mm
|
||
|
4 8 lines per 25,4 mm
|
||
|
5 6 lines per 30,0 mm
|
||
|
6 4 lines per 30,0 mm
|
||
|
7 3 lines per 30,0 mm
|
||
|
8 12 lines per 30,0 mm
|
||
|
9 2 lines per 25,4 mm
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.149
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps SP M
|
||
|
Mnemonic: IGS
|
||
|
Description: Identify graphic subrepertoire
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
IGS is used to indicate that a repertoire of the graphic characters of
|
||
|
ISO/IEC 10367 is used in the subsequent text.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The parameter value of IGS identifies a graphic character repertoire
|
||
|
registered in accordance with ISO/IEC 7350.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.66
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn ... SP N
|
||
|
Mnemonic: HTSA
|
||
|
Description: Character tabulation set absolute
|
||
|
|
||
|
The control function CHARACTER TABULATION SET ABSOLUTE (HTSA) which
|
||
|
was coded as a control sequence with any number of numeric parameters
|
||
|
(CSI Pn ... 02/00 04/14) and the use of which was already declared
|
||
|
deprecated in the fourth Edition of this Standard has now been
|
||
|
removed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.8.3
|
||
|
Status: standard; obsolete
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps SP O
|
||
|
Mnemonic: IDCS
|
||
|
Description: Identify device control string
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
IDCS is used to specify the purpose and format of the command string
|
||
|
of subsequent DEVICE CONTROL STRINGs (DCS). The specified purpose and
|
||
|
format remain in effect until the next occurrence of IDCS in the data
|
||
|
stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The parameter values are
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 reserved for use with the DIAGNOSTIC state of the STATUS REPORT
|
||
|
TRANSFER MODE (SRTM)
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 reserved for Dynamically Redefinable Character Sets (DRCS) according
|
||
|
to Standard ECMA-35.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The format and interpretation of the command string corresponding to
|
||
|
these parameter values are to be defined in appropriate standards. If
|
||
|
this control function is used to identify a private command string, a
|
||
|
private parameter value shall be used.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.65
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP P
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PPA
|
||
|
Description: Page position absolute
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
PPA causes the active data position to be moved in the data component
|
||
|
to the corresponding character position on the n-th page, where n
|
||
|
equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.96
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP Q
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PPR
|
||
|
Description: Page position forward
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
PPR causes the active data position to be moved in the data component
|
||
|
to the corresponding character position on the n-th following page,
|
||
|
where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.98
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP R
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PPB
|
||
|
Description: Page position backward
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
PPB causes the active data position to be moved in the data component
|
||
|
to the corresponding character position on the n-th preceding page,
|
||
|
where n equals the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.97
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP S
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SPD
|
||
|
Description: Select presentation directions
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps1 = 0; Ps2 = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SPD is used to select the line orientation, the line progression, and
|
||
|
the character path in the presentation component. It is also used to
|
||
|
update the content of the presentation component and the content of
|
||
|
the data component. This takes effect immediately.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 specifies the line orientation, the line progression and the
|
||
|
character path:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 line orientation: horizontal
|
||
|
line progression: top-to-bottom
|
||
|
character path: left-to-right
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 line orientation: vertical
|
||
|
line progression: right-to-left
|
||
|
character path: top-to-bottom
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 line orientation: vertical
|
||
|
line progression: left-to-right
|
||
|
character path: top-to-bottom
|
||
|
|
||
|
3 line orientation: horizontal
|
||
|
line progression: top-to-bottom
|
||
|
character path: right-to-left
|
||
|
|
||
|
4 line orientation: vertical
|
||
|
line progression: left-to-right
|
||
|
character path: bottom-to-top
|
||
|
|
||
|
5 line orientation: horizontal
|
||
|
line progression: bottom-to-top
|
||
|
character path: right-to-left
|
||
|
|
||
|
6 line orientation: horizontal
|
||
|
line progression: bottom-to-top
|
||
|
character path: left-to-right
|
||
|
|
||
|
7 line orientation: vertical
|
||
|
line progression: right-to-left
|
||
|
character path: bottom-to-top
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps2 specifies the effect on the content of the presentation component
|
||
|
and the content of the data component:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 undefined (implementation-dependent)
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
This may also permit the effect to take place after the next
|
||
|
occurrence of CR, FF or any control function which initiates an
|
||
|
absolute movement of the active presentation position or the active
|
||
|
data position.
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the content of the presentation component is updated to correspond
|
||
|
to the content of the data component according to the newly
|
||
|
established characteristics of the presentation component; the
|
||
|
active data position is moved to the first character position in the
|
||
|
first line in the data component, the active presentation position
|
||
|
in the presentation component is updated accordingly
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 the content of the data component is updated to correspond to the
|
||
|
content of the presentation component according to the newly
|
||
|
established characteristics of the presentation component; the active
|
||
|
presentation position is moved to the first character position in the
|
||
|
first line in the presentation component, the active data position in
|
||
|
the data component is updated accordingly.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.130
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 SP T
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DTA
|
||
|
Description: Dimension text area
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DTA is used to establish the dimensions of the text area for subsequent pages.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The established dimensions remain in effect until the next occurrence
|
||
|
of DTA in the data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn1 specifies the dimension in the direction perpendicular to the line
|
||
|
orientation
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn2 specifies the dimension in the direction parallel to the line orientation
|
||
|
|
||
|
The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established
|
||
|
by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.36
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP U
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SLH
|
||
|
Description: Set line home
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to PRESENTATION, SLH is
|
||
|
used to establish at character position n in the active line (the line
|
||
|
that contains the active presentation position) and lines of
|
||
|
subsequent text in the presentation component the position to which
|
||
|
the active presentation position will be moved by subsequent
|
||
|
occurrences of CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), DELETE LINE (DL), INSERT LINE
|
||
|
(IL) or NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream; where n equals the value
|
||
|
of Pn. In the case of a device without data component, it is also the
|
||
|
position ahead of which no implicit movement of the active
|
||
|
presentation position shall occur.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to DATA, SLH is used to
|
||
|
establish at character position n in the active line (the line that
|
||
|
contains the active data position) and lines of subsequent text in the
|
||
|
data component the position to which the active data position will be
|
||
|
moved by subsequent occurrences of CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), DELETE LINE
|
||
|
(DL), INSERT LINE (IL) or NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream; where n
|
||
|
equals the value of Pn. It is also the position ahead of which no
|
||
|
implicit movement of the active data position shall occur.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The established position is called the line home position and remains
|
||
|
in effect until the next occurrence of SLH in the data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.122
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP V
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SLL
|
||
|
Description: Set line limit
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to PRESENTATION, SLL is
|
||
|
used to establish at character position n in the active line (the line
|
||
|
that contains the active presentation position) and lines of
|
||
|
subsequent text in the presentation component the position to which
|
||
|
the active presentation position will be moved by subsequent
|
||
|
occurrences of CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data
|
||
|
stream if the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT DIRECTION
|
||
|
(SIMD) is equal to 1; where n equals the value of Pn. In the case of a
|
||
|
device without data component, it is also the position beyond which no
|
||
|
implicit movement of the active presentation position shall occur.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to DATA, SLL is used to
|
||
|
establish at character position n in the active line (the line that
|
||
|
contains the active data position) and lines of subsequent text in the
|
||
|
data component the position beyond which no implicit movement of the
|
||
|
active data position shall occur. It is also the position in the data
|
||
|
component to which the active data position will be moved by
|
||
|
subsequent occurrences of CR or NEL in the data stream, if the
|
||
|
parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT DIRECTION (SIMD) is equal
|
||
|
to 1.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The established position is called the line limit position and remains
|
||
|
in effect until the next occurrence of SLL in the data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.123
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP W
|
||
|
Mnemonic: FNK
|
||
|
Description: Function key
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
FNK is a control function in which the parameter value identifies the
|
||
|
function key which has been operated.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.52
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps SP X
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SPQR
|
||
|
Description: Select print quality and rapidity
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SPQR is used to select the relative print quality and the print speed
|
||
|
for devices the output quality and speed of which are inversely
|
||
|
related. The selected values remain in effect until the next
|
||
|
occurrence of SPQR in the data stream. The parameter values are
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 highest available print quality, low print speed
|
||
|
1 medium print quality, medium print speed
|
||
|
2 draft print quality, highest available print speed
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.134
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP Y
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SEF
|
||
|
Description: Sheet eject and feed
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default values: Ps1 = 0; Ps2 = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SEF causes a sheet of paper to be ejected from a printing device into
|
||
|
a specified output stacker and another sheet to be loaded into the
|
||
|
printing device from a specified paper bin.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter values of Ps1 are:
|
||
|
0 eject sheet, no new sheet loaded
|
||
|
1 eject sheet and load another from bin 1
|
||
|
2 eject sheet and load another from bin 2
|
||
|
...
|
||
|
n eject sheet and load another from bin n
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter values of Ps2 are:
|
||
|
0 eject sheet, no stacker specified
|
||
|
1 eject sheet into stacker 1
|
||
|
2 eject sheet into stacker 2
|
||
|
...
|
||
|
n eject sheet into stacker n
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.116
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps SP Z
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PEC
|
||
|
Description: Presentation expand or contract
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
PEC is used to establish the spacing and the extent of the graphic
|
||
|
characters for subsequent text. The spacing is specified in the line
|
||
|
as multiples of the spacing established by the most recent occurrence
|
||
|
of SET CHARACTER SPACING (SCS) or of SELECT CHARACTER SPACING (SHS) or
|
||
|
of SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the data stream. The extent of the
|
||
|
characters is implicitly established by these control functions. The
|
||
|
established spacing and the extent remain in effect until the next
|
||
|
occurrence of PEC, of SCS, of SHS or of SPI in the data stream. The
|
||
|
parameter values are
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 normal (as specified by SCS, SHS or SPI)
|
||
|
1 expanded (multiplied by a factor not greater than 2)
|
||
|
2 condensed (multiplied by a factor not less than 0,5)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.90
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP [
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SSW
|
||
|
Description: Set space width
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
SSW is used to establish for subsequent text the character escapement
|
||
|
associated with the character SPACE. The established escapement
|
||
|
remains in effect until the next occurrence of SSW in the data stream
|
||
|
or until it is reset to the default value by a subsequent occurrence
|
||
|
of CARRIAGE RETURN/LINE FEED (CR/LF), CARRIAGE RETURN/FORM FEED
|
||
|
(CR/FF), or of NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream, see annex C.
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn specifies the escapement. The unit in which the parameter value is
|
||
|
expressed is that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE
|
||
|
UNIT (SSU).
|
||
|
|
||
|
The default character escapement of SPACE is specified by the most
|
||
|
recent occurrence of SET CHARACTER SPACING (SCS) or of SELECT
|
||
|
CHARACTER SPACING (SHS) or of SELECT SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the
|
||
|
data stream if the current font has constant spacing, or is specified
|
||
|
by the nominal width of the character SPACE in the current font if
|
||
|
that font has proportional spacing.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.140
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP \
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SACS
|
||
|
Description: Set additional character separation
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SACS is used to establish extra inter-character escapement for
|
||
|
subsequent text. The established extra escapement remains in effect
|
||
|
until the next occurrence of SACS or of SET REDUCED CHARACTER
|
||
|
SEPARATION (SRCS) in the data stream or until it is reset to the
|
||
|
default value by a subsequent occurrence of CARRIAGE RETURN/LINE FEED
|
||
|
(CR LF) or of NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream, see annex C.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn specifies the number of units by which the inter-character
|
||
|
escapement is enlarged.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established
|
||
|
by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.107
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ... SP ]
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SAPV
|
||
|
Description: Select alternative presentation variants
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SAPV is used to specify one or more variants for the presentation of
|
||
|
subsequent text. The parameter values are
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 default presentation (implementation-defined); cancels the effect of
|
||
|
any preceding occurrence of SAPV in the data stream
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the decimal digits are presented by means of the graphic symbols
|
||
|
used in the Latin script
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 the decimal digits are presented by means of the graphic symbols
|
||
|
used in the Arabic script, i.e. the Hindi symbols
|
||
|
|
||
|
3 when the direction of the character path is right-to-left, each of
|
||
|
the graphic characters in the graphic character set(s) in use which
|
||
|
is one of a left/right-handed pair (parentheses, square brackets,
|
||
|
curly brackets, greater-than/less-than signs, etc.) is presented as
|
||
|
"mirrored", i.e. as the other member of the pair. For example, the
|
||
|
coded graphic character given the name LEFT PARENTHESIS is presented
|
||
|
as RIGHT PARENTHESIS, and vice versa
|
||
|
|
||
|
4 when the direction of the character path is right-to-left, all
|
||
|
graphic characters which represent operators and delimiters in
|
||
|
mathematical formulae and which are not symmetrical about a vertical
|
||
|
axis are presented as mirrored about that vertical axis
|
||
|
|
||
|
5 the following graphic character is presented in its isolated form
|
||
|
|
||
|
6 the following graphic character is presented in its initial form
|
||
|
|
||
|
7 the following graphic character is presented in its medial form
|
||
|
|
||
|
8 the following graphic character is presented in its final form
|
||
|
|
||
|
9 where the bit combination 02/14 is intended to represent a decimal
|
||
|
mark in a decimal number it shall be presented by means of the
|
||
|
graphic symbol FULL STOP
|
||
|
|
||
|
10 where the bit combination 02/14 is intended to represent a decimal
|
||
|
mark in a decimal number it shall be presented by means of the
|
||
|
graphic symbol COMMA
|
||
|
|
||
|
11 vowels are presented above or below the preceding character
|
||
|
|
||
|
12 vowels are presented after the preceding character
|
||
|
|
||
|
13 contextual shape determination of Arabic scripts, including the
|
||
|
LAM-ALEPH ligature but excluding all other Arabic ligatures
|
||
|
|
||
|
14 contextual shape determination of Arabic scripts, excluding all
|
||
|
Arabic ligatures
|
||
|
|
||
|
15 cancels the effect of parameter values 3 and 4
|
||
|
|
||
|
16 vowels are not presented
|
||
|
|
||
|
17 when the string direction is right-to-left, the italicized
|
||
|
characters are slanted to the left; when the string direction is
|
||
|
left-to-right, the italicized characters are slanted to the right
|
||
|
|
||
|
18 contextual shape determination of Arabic scripts is not used, the
|
||
|
graphic characters - including the digits - are presented in the
|
||
|
form they are stored (Pass-through)
|
||
|
|
||
|
19 contextual shape determination of Arabic scripts is not used, the
|
||
|
graphic characters- excluding the digits - are presented in the
|
||
|
form they are stored (Pass-through)
|
||
|
|
||
|
20 the graphic symbols used to present the decimal digits are device
|
||
|
dependent
|
||
|
|
||
|
21 establishes the effect of parameter values 5, 6, 7, and 8 for the
|
||
|
following graphic characters until cancelled
|
||
|
|
||
|
22 cancels the effect of parameter value 21, i.e. re-establishes the
|
||
|
effect of parameter values 5, 6, 7, and 8 for the next single
|
||
|
graphic character only.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.108
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps SP ^
|
||
|
Mnemonic: STAB
|
||
|
Description: Selective tabulation
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
STAB causes subsequent text in the presentation component to be
|
||
|
aligned according to the position and the properties of a tabulation
|
||
|
stop which is selected from a list according to the value of the
|
||
|
parameter Ps.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The use of this control function and means of specifying a list of
|
||
|
tabulation stops to be referenced by the control function are
|
||
|
specified in other standards, for example ISO 8613-6.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.144
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps SP _
|
||
|
Mnemonic: GCC
|
||
|
Description: Graphic character combination
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
GCC is used to indicate that two or more graphic characters are to be
|
||
|
imaged as one single graphic symbol. GCC with a parameter value of 0
|
||
|
indicates that the following two graphic characters are to be imaged
|
||
|
as one single graphic symbol; GCC with a parameter value of 1 and GCC
|
||
|
with a parameter value of 2 indicate respectively the beginning and
|
||
|
the end of a string of graphic characters which are to be imaged as
|
||
|
one single graphic symbol.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
GCC does not explicitly specify the relative sizes or placements of
|
||
|
the component parts of a composite graphic symbol. In the simplest
|
||
|
case, two components may be "half-width" and side-by-side. For
|
||
|
example, in Japanese text a pair of characters may be presented
|
||
|
side-by-side, and occupy the space of a normal-size Kanji character.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.54
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP `
|
||
|
Mnemonic: TATE
|
||
|
Description: Tabulation aligned trailing edge
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
TATE causes a character tabulation stop calling for trailing edge
|
||
|
alignment to be set at character position n in the active line (the
|
||
|
line that contains the active presentation position) and lines of
|
||
|
subsequent text in the presentation component, where n equals the
|
||
|
value of Pn. TATE causes the replacement of any tabulation stop
|
||
|
previously set at that character position, but does not affect other
|
||
|
tabulation stops.
|
||
|
|
||
|
A text string aligned with a tabulation stop set by TATE will be
|
||
|
positioned so that the (trailing edge of the) first graphic character
|
||
|
of the string is placed at the tabulation stop.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.153
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP a
|
||
|
Mnemonic: TALE
|
||
|
Description: Tabulation aligned leading edge
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
TALE causes a character tabulation stop calling for leading edge
|
||
|
alignment to be set at character position n in the active line (the
|
||
|
line that contains the active presentation position) and lines of
|
||
|
subsequent text in the presentation component, where n equals the
|
||
|
value of Pn. TALE causes the replacement of any tabulation stop
|
||
|
previously set at that character position, but does not affect other
|
||
|
tabulation stops.
|
||
|
|
||
|
A text string aligned with a tabulation stop set by TALE will be
|
||
|
positioned so that the (leading edge of the) last graphic character of
|
||
|
the string is placed at the tabulation stop.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.152
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP b
|
||
|
Mnemonic: TAC
|
||
|
Description: Tabulation aligned centred
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
TAC causes a character tabulation stop calling for centring to be set
|
||
|
at character position n in the active line (the line that contains the
|
||
|
active presentation position) and lines of subsequent text in the
|
||
|
presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. TAC causes the
|
||
|
replacement of any tabulation stop previously set at that character
|
||
|
position, but does not affect other tabulation stops.
|
||
|
|
||
|
A text string centred upon a tabulation stop set by TAC will be
|
||
|
positioned so that the (trailing edge of the) first graphic character
|
||
|
and the (leading edge of the) last graphic character are at
|
||
|
approximately equal distances from the tabulation stop.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.151
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 SP c
|
||
|
Mnemonic: TCC
|
||
|
Description: Tabulation centred on character
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value for Pn1
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn2 = 32
|
||
|
|
||
|
TCC causes a character tabulation stop calling for alignment of a
|
||
|
target graphic character to be set at character position n in the
|
||
|
active line (the line that contains the active presentation position)
|
||
|
and lines of subsequent text in the presentation component, where n
|
||
|
equals the value of Pn1, and the target character about which centring
|
||
|
is to be performed is specified by Pn2. TCC causes the replacement of
|
||
|
any tabulation stop previously set at that character position, but
|
||
|
does not affect other tabulation stops.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The positioning of a text string aligned with a tabulation stop set by
|
||
|
TCC will be determined by the first occurrence in the string of the
|
||
|
target graphic character; that character will be centred upon the
|
||
|
tabulation stop. If the target character does not occur within the
|
||
|
string, then the trailing edge of the first character of the string
|
||
|
will be positioned at the tabulation stop.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The value of Pn2 indicates the code table position (binary value) of
|
||
|
the target character in the currently invoked code. For a 7-bit code,
|
||
|
the permissible range of values is 32 to 127; for an 8-bit code, the
|
||
|
permissible range of values is 32 to 127 and 160 to 255.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.155
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP d
|
||
|
Mnemonic: TSR
|
||
|
Description: Tabulation stop remove
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
TSR causes any character tabulation stop at character position n in
|
||
|
the active line (the line that contains the active presentation
|
||
|
position) and lines of subsequent text in the presentation component
|
||
|
to be cleared, but does not affect other tabulation stops. n equals
|
||
|
the value of Pn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.156
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps SP e
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SCO
|
||
|
Description: Select character orientation
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Ps = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SCO is used to establish the amount of rotation of the graphic
|
||
|
characters following in the data stream. The established value
|
||
|
remains in effect until the next occurrence of SCO in the data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The parameter values are
|
||
|
0 0 deg
|
||
|
1 45 deg
|
||
|
2 90 deg
|
||
|
3 135 deg
|
||
|
4 180 deg
|
||
|
5 225 deg
|
||
|
6 270 deg
|
||
|
7 315 deg
|
||
|
|
||
|
Rotation is positive, i.e. counter-clockwise and applies to the normal
|
||
|
presentation of the graphic characters along the character path. The
|
||
|
centre of rotation of the affected graphic characters is not defined
|
||
|
by this Standard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.110
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP f
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SRCS
|
||
|
Description: Set reduced character separation
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameter default value: Pn = 0
|
||
|
|
||
|
SRCS is used to establish reduced inter-character escapement for
|
||
|
subsequent text. The established reduced escapement remains in effect
|
||
|
until the next occurrence of SRCS or of SET ADDITIONAL CHARACTER
|
||
|
SEPARATION (SACS) in the data stream or until it is reset to the
|
||
|
default value by a subsequent occurrence of CARRIAGE RETURN/LINE FEED
|
||
|
(CR/LF) or of NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream, see annex C.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn specifies the number of units by which the inter-character
|
||
|
escapement is reduced.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The unit in which the parameter values are expressed is that
|
||
|
established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.136
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP g
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SCS
|
||
|
Description: Set character spacing
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
SCS is used to establish the character spacing for subsequent
|
||
|
text. The established spacing remains in effect until the next
|
||
|
occurrence of SCS, or of SELECT CHARACTER SPACING (SHS) or of SPACING
|
||
|
INCREMENT (SPI) in the data stream, see annex C.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn specifies the character spacing.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established
|
||
|
by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.112
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP h
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SLS
|
||
|
Description: Set line spacing
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
SLS is used to establish the line spacing for subsequent text. The
|
||
|
established spacing remains in effect until the next occurrence of SLS
|
||
|
or of SELECT LINE SPACING (SVS) or of SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the
|
||
|
data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn specifies the line spacing.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established
|
||
|
by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.124
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP i
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SPH
|
||
|
Description: Set page home
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to PRESENTATION, SPH is
|
||
|
used to establish at line position n in the active page (the page that
|
||
|
contains the active presentation position) and subsequent pages in the
|
||
|
presentation component the position to which the active presentation
|
||
|
position will be moved by subsequent occurrences of FORM FEED (FF) in
|
||
|
the data stream; where n equals the value of Pn. In the case of a
|
||
|
device without data component, it is also the position ahead of which
|
||
|
no implicit movement of the active presentation position shall occur.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to DATA, SPH is used to
|
||
|
establish at line position n in the active page (the page that
|
||
|
contains the active data position) and subsequent pages in the data
|
||
|
component the position to which the active data position will be moved
|
||
|
by subsequent occurrences of FORM FEED (FF) in the data stream; where
|
||
|
n equals the value of Pn. It is also the position ahead of which no
|
||
|
implicit movement of the active presentation position shall occur.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The established position is called the page home position and remains
|
||
|
in effect until the next occurrence of SPH in the data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.131
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn SP j
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SPL
|
||
|
Description: Set page limit
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to PRESENTATION, SPL is
|
||
|
used to establish at line position n in the active page (the page that
|
||
|
contains the active presentation position) and pages of subsequent
|
||
|
text in the presentation component the position beyond which the
|
||
|
active presentation position can normally not be moved; where n equals
|
||
|
the value of Pn. In the case of a device without data component, it is
|
||
|
also the position beyond which no implicit movement of the active
|
||
|
presentation position shall occur.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to DATA, SPL is used to
|
||
|
establish at line position n in the active page (the page that
|
||
|
contains the active data position) and pages of subsequent text in the
|
||
|
data component the position beyond which no implicit movement of the
|
||
|
active data position shall occur.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The established position is called the page limit position and remains
|
||
|
in effect until the next occurrence of SPL in the data stream.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.133
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP k
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SCP
|
||
|
Description: Select character path
|
||
|
|
||
|
No parameter default values.
|
||
|
|
||
|
SCP is used to select the character path, relative to the line
|
||
|
orientation, for the active line (the line that contains the active
|
||
|
presentation position) and subsequent lines in the presentation
|
||
|
component. It is also used to update the content of the active line in
|
||
|
the presentation component and the content of the active line (the
|
||
|
line that contains the active data position) in the data
|
||
|
component. This takes effect immediately.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 specifies the character path:
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 left-to-right (in the case of horizontal line orientation), or
|
||
|
top-to-bottom (in the case of vertical line orientation)
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 right-to-left (in the case of horizontal line orientation), or
|
||
|
bottom-to-top (in the case of vertical line orientation)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps2 specifies the effect on the content of the presentation component
|
||
|
and the content of the data component:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 undefined (implementation-dependent)
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
This may also permit the effect to take place after the next
|
||
|
occurrence of CR, NEL or any control function which initiates an
|
||
|
absolute movement of the active presentation position or the active
|
||
|
data position.
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 the content of the active line in the presentation component (the
|
||
|
line that contains the active presentation position) is updated to
|
||
|
correspond to the content of the active line in the data component
|
||
|
(the line that contains the active data position) according to the
|
||
|
newly established character path characteristics in the presentation
|
||
|
component; the active data position is moved to the first character
|
||
|
position in the active line in the data component, the active
|
||
|
presentation position in the presentation component is updated
|
||
|
accordingly
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 the content of the active line in the data component (the line that
|
||
|
contains the active data position) is updated to correspond to the
|
||
|
content of the active line in the presentation component (the line
|
||
|
that contains the active presentation position) according to the newly
|
||
|
established character path characteristics of the presentation
|
||
|
component; the active presentation position is moved to the first
|
||
|
character position in the active line in the presentation component,
|
||
|
the active data position in the data component is updated
|
||
|
accordingly.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.111
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps SP q
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSCUSR
|
||
|
Description: Set cursor style
|
||
|
|
||
|
Where ps can be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 meaning Blinking Block, Blinking Block,
|
||
|
Steady Block, Blink Underline, Steady Underline, respectively.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT520
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... SP s
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECNS
|
||
|
Description: New sheet
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; PPL3
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... SP w
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSITF
|
||
|
Description: Select input tray failover
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; PPL3
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... SP x
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSDPM
|
||
|
Description: Set Duplex Print Mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; PPL3
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... SP z
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECVPFS
|
||
|
Description: Variable page format select
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; PPL3
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... SP {
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSSS
|
||
|
Description: Set sheet size
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; PPL3
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... SP |
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRVEC
|
||
|
Description: Draw relative vector
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; PPL3
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI !
|
||
|
Description: Determining RIP support
|
||
|
|
||
|
The ESC[! is the code that RIP supporting BBS's use to determine
|
||
|
whether your terminal has RIP (Remote Imaging Protocol) support. If so,
|
||
|
then your terminal returns a string to the remote side in the form
|
||
|
"RIPScript version x.xx" or some such thing. This is probably why you have
|
||
|
been receiving that code.
|
||
|
|
||
|
I found the RIPscript 1.54 spec at ftp.telegrafix.com.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source:
|
||
|
<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: TeleGrafix private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ! p
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSTR
|
||
|
Description: Soft terminal reset
|
||
|
|
||
|
sets terminal to power-up default states
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
"VT220 Programmer Pocket Guide" EK-VT220-HR-001, page 33
|
||
|
|
||
|
(keeps screen)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/msvibm_vt.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT220
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ! s
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECFIL
|
||
|
Description: Right justification
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 <= Pn1 <= 1535 (1/720-inch units, 1/120-inch increments)
|
||
|
0 <= Pn2 <= 255 (number of printing characters)
|
||
|
0 <= Pn3 <= 1535 (1/720-inch units, 1/120-inch increments)
|
||
|
0 <= Pn4 <= 255 (number of spaces)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE102
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LQP02
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ! v
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECASFC
|
||
|
Description: Automatic sheet feeder control
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; PPL2
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn ! w
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECUND
|
||
|
Description: Select undeline character
|
||
|
|
||
|
Select underline character Pn other than default character.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE90
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LQP02
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ! x
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECPTS
|
||
|
Description: Printwheel table select
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps == 0,1 Select printwheel table 1
|
||
|
Ps == 2 Select printwheel table 2
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE90
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LQP02
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn ! y
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSS
|
||
|
Descripton: Select spacing
|
||
|
|
||
|
Set horizontal spacing increment (proportional spacing mode).
|
||
|
|
||
|
6 <= Pn <= 768 (decipoint units, 1/720 inch)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppE91,E99
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LQP02
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 ! |
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECVEC
|
||
|
Description: Draw vector
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 Meaning
|
||
|
0 Draw X line
|
||
|
1 Draw Y line
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn1 = X start value
|
||
|
Pn2 = Y start value
|
||
|
Pn4 = line length
|
||
|
Pn5 = line width
|
||
|
|
||
|
Units are decipoints or pixels according to SSU.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE107
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LN03
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... ! }
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECFIN
|
||
|
Description: Document finishing
|
||
|
|
||
|
Instructs the device whether to change the offset at which paper is
|
||
|
delivered to the output tray.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LQP03
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Ps2 " p
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSCL
|
||
|
Description: Set compatibility level
|
||
|
|
||
|
CSI 6 1 " p -> Level 1 (VT100) compatibility
|
||
|
CSI 6 2 " p -> Level 2 (VT200) compatibility, 8-bit controls
|
||
|
CSI 6 2 ; 0 " p -> ditto
|
||
|
CSI 6 2 ; 1 " p -> ditto, 7-bit controls
|
||
|
CSI 6 2 ; 2 " p -> ditto, 8-bit controls
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 = 63 selects Level 3 (VT300)
|
||
|
Ps1 = 64 selects Level 4 (VT400)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html> VT220 Ref Manual
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT200
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps " q
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSCA
|
||
|
Description: Select character attributes
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps Action
|
||
|
0 All attributes off (does not apply to SGR)
|
||
|
1 Designate character as "non-erasable" by DECSEL/DECSED. (Attribute on)
|
||
|
2 Designate character "erasable" by DECSEL/DECSED. (Attribute off)
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE: A parameter value of 0 implies the default which is attributes
|
||
|
off (erasable by DECSEL/DECSED). A parameter value of 2 is an explicit
|
||
|
request for this attribute to be off (erasable by DECSEL/DECSED).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Souce: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 " s
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECPWA
|
||
|
Description: Page width alignment
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn1 specifies the left edge of the print arera relatiove to the left
|
||
|
edge of platen. Pn2 specifies width of print area. Pn1 and Pn2 are
|
||
|
measured in units of 1/12 inch.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE42
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; printers
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... " v
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRQDE
|
||
|
Description: Request device extent
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... " w
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRPDE
|
||
|
Description: Report device extent
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... " z
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECDEN
|
||
|
Description: Select density
|
||
|
|
||
|
ESC [ 0 " z selects default (draft) density
|
||
|
ESC [ 1 " z selects draft density
|
||
|
ESC [ 2 " z selects letter density (medium or high density depending on
|
||
|
DPS).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE46
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; printers
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ; " { String ST
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRFS
|
||
|
Description: Request font status
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps Meaning
|
||
|
0 Send status of all fonts
|
||
|
1 Send status of ROM resident, down line loaded, and cartridge
|
||
|
2 Send status of memory bytes remaining for host loaded fonts
|
||
|
|
||
|
String = type family and font
|
||
|
|
||
|
Response (DECFSR) is:
|
||
|
|
||
|
CSI 2 " nnn ST
|
||
|
|
||
|
Where nnn = number of bytes remaining in memory
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE107
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LN03
|
||
|
|
||
|
Response is:
|
||
|
|
||
|
ESC [ ? Pn ; Pm SP D
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE124
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LCP01
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn $ p
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRQM
|
||
|
Description: Request mode settings
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn is a mode number, as passed to SM or RM. It can include a leading
|
||
|
? to specify a DEC private mode. The terminal returns CSI Pn ; Pn2 $
|
||
|
y, where Pn2 is 1 if the mode is in the set state.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Paul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in comp.terminals
|
||
|
<7t76qq$23q$1@nnrp1.deja.com>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Ps1 ... Psn $ r
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECCARA
|
||
|
Description: Change attributes in rectangular area
|
||
|
|
||
|
Change the visual attributes for characters in a specified area of
|
||
|
display memorythe characters themselves remain unchanged. The DECSACE
|
||
|
control function is used to determine whether all or just some of the
|
||
|
character positions are affected. The parameters are:
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn1 Top line
|
||
|
Pn2 Left column
|
||
|
Pn3 Bottom line
|
||
|
Pn4 Right column
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps1 ... Psn are standard SGR character attributes.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT420
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Ps1 ; ... ; Psn $ t
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRARA
|
||
|
Description: Reverse attributes in rectangular area
|
||
|
|
||
|
Reverse the visual attributes for characters in a specified area of
|
||
|
display memorythe characters themselves remain unchanged. The DECSACE
|
||
|
control function is used to determine whether all or just some of the
|
||
|
character positions are affected. The parameters are:
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn1 Top line
|
||
|
Pn2 Left column
|
||
|
Pn3 Bottom line
|
||
|
Pn4 Right column
|
||
|
Ps1...Psn Normal SGR character attributes
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT420
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ; ... $ u
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRQTSR
|
||
|
Description: Request terminal state report
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps = 1 => Host request for a terminal state report (returns DECTSR)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps = 2 => Host request for color table report. In this case the
|
||
|
second parameter signifies the colour space; 0 or 1
|
||
|
indicates HLS (the default) and 2 indicates RGB. The reply
|
||
|
is DECCTR. If the terminal doesn't understand, it responds
|
||
|
with DCS 0 $ s ST.
|
||
|
|
||
|
RBComm always returns DCS 1 $ ST (no state information returned)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 ; Pn6 ; Pn7 ; Pn8 $ v
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECCRA
|
||
|
Description: Copy rectangular area
|
||
|
|
||
|
Copy a rectangular area of display memory from one part of page memory
|
||
|
to another. Characters and their attributes remain unchanged. The
|
||
|
parameters Pn1 through Pn5 describe the area to be copied:
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn1 Top line
|
||
|
Pn2 Left column
|
||
|
Pn3 Bottom line
|
||
|
Pn4 Right column
|
||
|
Pn5 Page number
|
||
|
|
||
|
The parameters <n6> through <n8> describe where the area should be copied:
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn6 Top line
|
||
|
Pn7 Left column
|
||
|
Pn8 Page number
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps $ w
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRQPSR
|
||
|
Description: Request presentation state report
|
||
|
|
||
|
/*
|
||
|
* From Kermit 3.13 & VT220 pocket guide
|
||
|
*
|
||
|
* Request CSI 1 $ w cursor information report
|
||
|
|
||
|
See DECCIR for response
|
||
|
|
||
|
CSI 2 $ w tab stop report
|
||
|
|
||
|
See DECTABSR for response
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Source: vttest-990712 vt420.c
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT300
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 $ x
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECFRA
|
||
|
Description: Fill rectangular area
|
||
|
|
||
|
Fill an area in display memory with a specified character. The fill
|
||
|
character takes on the visual attributes set by the last SGR control
|
||
|
function, not the attributes of the characters that it replaces.
|
||
|
Current line attributes (for example, the attributes that specify
|
||
|
double-wide, double-high characters) remain unchanged. The parameters
|
||
|
are:
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn1 Decimal code of fill character
|
||
|
Pn2 Top line
|
||
|
Pn3 Left column
|
||
|
Pn4 Bottom line
|
||
|
Pn5 Right column
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn ; Ps $ y
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRPM
|
||
|
Description: Report mode settings
|
||
|
|
||
|
You can query setting of this with
|
||
|
CSI ? 67 $ p
|
||
|
response CSI ? 67 ; Ps $ y
|
||
|
where Ps : 0 = unkown mode
|
||
|
1 = set
|
||
|
2 = reset
|
||
|
3 = permanently set
|
||
|
4 = permanently reset
|
||
|
This query is possible if terminal supports terminal interrogation commands
|
||
|
(== VT400 series or better).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_terminals_news.txt>
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT300
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSU Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 $ z
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECERA
|
||
|
Description: Erase rectangular area
|
||
|
|
||
|
Erase the characters (and their visual attributes) in the specified
|
||
|
rectangular area and replace each one with a space (decimal 32). Line
|
||
|
attributes (for example, the attributes that specify double-wide,
|
||
|
double-high characters) are not erased. The areas to erase are:
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn1 Top line
|
||
|
Pn2 Left column
|
||
|
Pn3 Bottom line
|
||
|
Pn4 Right column
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 $ {
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSERA
|
||
|
Description: Selective erase rectangular area
|
||
|
|
||
|
Erase all erasable characters from a specified rectangular area in
|
||
|
page memory; a space character replaces erased character
|
||
|
positions. The DECSERA control function does not change:
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Visual attributes set by the select graphic rendition (SGR) function.
|
||
|
* Protection attributes set by DECSCA.
|
||
|
* Line attributes.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The parameters are:
|
||
|
Pn1 Top line
|
||
|
Pn2 Left column
|
||
|
Pn3 Bottom line
|
||
|
Pn4 Right column
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps $ |
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSCPP
|
||
|
Description: Set columns per page
|
||
|
The VT330 also implements the DECSCPP (set columns per page) as the
|
||
|
preferred new way; it does not reset the scrolling regions or clear
|
||
|
page memory as DECCOLM does.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Esc [ $ | sets each page to 80 columns
|
||
|
Esc [ 0 $ | sets each page to 80 columns
|
||
|
Esc [ 8 0 $ | sets each page to 80 columns
|
||
|
Esc [ 1 3 2 $ | sets each page to 132 columns
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT330
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps $ }
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSASD
|
||
|
Description: Select active status display
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps = 0 -> none
|
||
|
Ps = 1 -> status
|
||
|
|
||
|
This means CSI 0 $ } selects the main display, and CSI 1 $ } selects
|
||
|
the status line.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT320
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps $ ~
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSSDT
|
||
|
Desription: Select status display type
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps = 0 -> none
|
||
|
Ps = 1 -> indicator (shows cursor position etc)
|
||
|
Ps = 2 -> host writeable
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT320
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn & q
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSNC
|
||
|
Description: Set number of copies
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; PPL3
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... & u
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRQUPSS
|
||
|
Description: Request user-preferred supplemental set
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pe ; Pb ; Pr ; Pc ; Pp & w
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECLRP
|
||
|
Description: Locator report
|
||
|
|
||
|
When a selected trigger event occurs such as a button press or
|
||
|
release, the terminal transmits a locator position report as follows.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pe is the event code
|
||
|
Pb is the button code
|
||
|
Pr is the row coordinate
|
||
|
Pc is the column coordinate
|
||
|
Pp is the third coordinate (page number)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pe, the event code indicates what event caused this report to be
|
||
|
generated. The following event codes are defined:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 - request, the terminal received an explicit request
|
||
|
for a locator report, but the locator is unavailable
|
||
|
1 - request, the terminal received an explicit
|
||
|
request for a locator report
|
||
|
2 - left button down
|
||
|
3 - left button up
|
||
|
4 - middle button down
|
||
|
5 - middle button up
|
||
|
6 - right button down
|
||
|
7 - right button up
|
||
|
8 - fourth button down
|
||
|
9 - fourth button up
|
||
|
10 - locator outside filter rectangle
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pb is the button code, ASCII decimal 0-15 indicating which buttons are
|
||
|
down if any. The state of the four buttons on the locator correspond
|
||
|
to the low four bits of the decimal value, "1" means button depressed
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 - no buttons down
|
||
|
1 - right
|
||
|
2 - middle
|
||
|
4 - left
|
||
|
8 - fourth
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pr is the row coordinate of the locator position in the page, encoded
|
||
|
as an ASCII decimal value. If Pr is omitted, the locator position is
|
||
|
undefined (outside the terminal window for example).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pc is the column coordinate of the locator position in the page,
|
||
|
encoded as an ASCII decimal value. If Pc is omitted, the locator
|
||
|
position is undefined (outside the terminal window for example).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pp is the page coordinate of the locator position encoded as an ASCII
|
||
|
decimal value. The page coordinate may be omitted if the locator is on
|
||
|
page one (the default).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Each locator report includes both the specific transition which caused
|
||
|
this event, and the current button state. This allows software to
|
||
|
determine what event just occured and which buttons are down without
|
||
|
keeping track of previous events or button state. In a multiprocess
|
||
|
shared locator environment, an application may not know the previous
|
||
|
button state. This dual reporting also allows applications to recover
|
||
|
from lost locator reports.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Each locator event generates a single report. In the rare situation
|
||
|
where two events occur simultaneously (within a single sampling
|
||
|
period), the terminal will report this as two separate events. The
|
||
|
order of reporting shall be by increasing event code number (left
|
||
|
button first).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Locator events are queued in the keyboard input silo just like
|
||
|
keystrokes. Each locator event occupies one position in the silo (the
|
||
|
keyboard silo currently must have at least 9 positions). If the input
|
||
|
silo becomes full, the locator and keyboard are locked until there is
|
||
|
again room in the silo. The sequential order of keystroke and locator
|
||
|
events is strictly maintained.
|
||
|
|
||
|
It is the responsibility of the host to accept data fast enough to
|
||
|
avoid locking the locator unintentionally. The limited buffering
|
||
|
inside the terminal gives the host a little more time to process
|
||
|
locator events smoothly.
|
||
|
|
||
|
When the keyboard is locked, the "wait" indicator on the keyboard
|
||
|
turns on. The keyboard is automatically locked any time the keyboard
|
||
|
input silo is full. The keyboard can be locked explicitly using the
|
||
|
keyboard action mode (KAM) control function.
|
||
|
|
||
|
When the locator is locked, the terminal continues to track the
|
||
|
locator, but the input cursor changes shape to appear as a wristwatch
|
||
|
(or other shape indicating to wait). The wristwatch cursor indicates
|
||
|
that locator button transitions will be ignored, but allows the user
|
||
|
to continue positioning in anticipation of the locator being
|
||
|
unlocked. The locator is automatically locked any time the input silo
|
||
|
is full.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Locator-ahead, analogous to keyboard type-ahead is supported by having
|
||
|
each report include the locator position at the time of the event, and
|
||
|
maintaining the sequential order of keystroke and locator events.
|
||
|
|
||
|
A final implication of using the keyboard silo to buffer text locator
|
||
|
events is that locator and keyboard input should be associated with
|
||
|
the same session at all times. The session to receive these events is
|
||
|
sometimes called the "active session" or "input focus". In a
|
||
|
multi-session windowing environment, the input cursor is allowed to
|
||
|
roam freely over the entire screen in response to locator
|
||
|
movement. The input cursor is never occluded when locator reporting is
|
||
|
enabled in one or more sessions. Each session enables locator
|
||
|
reporting independently. The following cases describe the locator
|
||
|
interaction with session viewports and scroll regions.
|
||
|
|
||
|
1. The input cursor is within the active session's viewport. Pressing
|
||
|
a button on the locator sends alocator report when enabled.
|
||
|
|
||
|
2. The input cursor is inside the active session's viewport, but
|
||
|
outside the range of defined coordinates for that session. Pressing
|
||
|
a button on the locator will generate a report with omitted
|
||
|
coordinates (position undefined). An example would be when the
|
||
|
input cursor is outside the active scrolling region, and the origin
|
||
|
mode has been set to relative. To use the locator to adjust scroll
|
||
|
margins, the origin mode must be absolute.
|
||
|
|
||
|
3. The input cursor is not contained in any viewport. Pressing a
|
||
|
button on the locator will have no effect. To support "pop up"
|
||
|
menus anywhere on the screen, the entire screen must be a viewport
|
||
|
for at least one session.
|
||
|
|
||
|
4. The input cursor is within a viewport of a session which is not the
|
||
|
active session. Pressing a button on the locator will normally make
|
||
|
the session containing the input cursor the active session
|
||
|
(possibly changing the occlusion order of viewports, and the shape
|
||
|
of the locator). This case is the responsibility of the "window
|
||
|
manager" which is free to define its own user interface. Two
|
||
|
recommendations are: (1) No locator report should be sent to the
|
||
|
previous active session, since the locator is not in its viewport;
|
||
|
and (2) If locator reporting is enabled in the new session, a
|
||
|
locator report should not be transmitted to avoid application side
|
||
|
affects when selecting another window.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT340?
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... & x
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECES
|
||
|
Description: Enable session management
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... ' q
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSBCA
|
||
|
Description: Select bar code attributes
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; PPL2
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pt ; Pl ; Pb ; Pr ' w
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECEFR
|
||
|
Description: Enable filter rectangle
|
||
|
|
||
|
Filter Rectangles add filtered movement events to the list of locator
|
||
|
transitions that can generate reports.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pt - Top boundary of filter rectangle
|
||
|
Pl - Left boundary of filter rectangle
|
||
|
Pb - Bottom boundary of filter rectangle
|
||
|
Pr - Right boundary of filter rectangle
|
||
|
|
||
|
The DECEFR control sequence defines the coordinates of a filter
|
||
|
rectangle, and activates it. Anytime the locator is detected to be
|
||
|
outside a filter rectangle, an outside rectangle event is generated
|
||
|
and the rectangle is disabled. Filter rectangles are always treated as
|
||
|
"one-shot" events. Defining a new rectangle re-activates it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Applications can re-define the rectangle at any time even if its
|
||
|
already active. If a rectangle which does not contain the locator is
|
||
|
specified, the terminal will generate an outside rectangle report
|
||
|
immediately and deactivate it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pt, Pl, Pb, and Pr are in coordinates units specified by the last
|
||
|
DECELR sequence. The filter rectangle includes the boundaries (similar
|
||
|
to other rectangular area operations). The origin is coordinate pair
|
||
|
1:1 in the upper left corner. If any parameters are omitted, they are
|
||
|
defaulted to the current locator position. Sending DECEFR with no
|
||
|
parameters will cause the application to be notified for any locator
|
||
|
movement ("unfiltered movement event").
|
||
|
|
||
|
DECELR always cancels any previous filter rectangle definition. This
|
||
|
gaurantees that when an application enables locator reports, there
|
||
|
will never be an outstanding filter rectangle.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If a filter rectangle lies on the edge of the defined coordinate space
|
||
|
for the active session, and the locator crosses that edge, the
|
||
|
rectangle may be triggered to send a report with omitted coordinates
|
||
|
(locator position undefined).
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the active session receives a filter rectangle with explicit
|
||
|
coordinates while the locator is outside the defined coordinate space,
|
||
|
the rectangle will be triggered to send a report with omitted
|
||
|
coordinates.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the active session receives a filter rectangle with omitted
|
||
|
coordinates (that is, use the current position) while the locator is
|
||
|
outside the defined coordinate space (position undefined), the
|
||
|
rectangle will be triggered the next time the locator is within the
|
||
|
defined coordinate space.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If a session which is not the active session receives a filter
|
||
|
rectangle with explicit coordinates, it should trigger immediately
|
||
|
with position undefined. If a session which is not the active session
|
||
|
receives a rectangle with omitted coordinates, it should trigger the
|
||
|
next time the locator is within the defined coordinate space for that
|
||
|
session, which cannot happen until the session becomes active.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT340?
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ; Pu ' z
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECELR
|
||
|
Description: Enable locator reports
|
||
|
|
||
|
Locator reporting can be selectively enabled from the host using a DEC
|
||
|
private control sequence. When disabled (the power up default), the
|
||
|
locator cursor does not appear, and the locator buttons are
|
||
|
inactive. When enabled, the locator cursor is visible, and the
|
||
|
terminal tracks the locator locally with no host
|
||
|
intervention. Individual locator events such as locator button
|
||
|
transitions or movement may be programmed to send locator reports to
|
||
|
the host.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps may assume the following values
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 locator disabled (default)
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 locator reports enabled
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 one shot (allow one report, then disable)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pu specifies the coordinate units for locator reports
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 (or omitted) default to character cells
|
||
|
|
||
|
1 device physical pixels
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 character cells
|
||
|
|
||
|
One shot mode is provided for applications that desire simple graphics
|
||
|
input similar to Tektronix GIN mode (no unsolicited reports). If
|
||
|
parameter value 2 is selected, the next trigger event that occurs will
|
||
|
generate a single locator report. No further locator reports will
|
||
|
occur (the locator will be disabled), until another DECELR sequence is
|
||
|
received.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The coordinate units for locator position reports may be selected to
|
||
|
either of two coordinate systems used by terminal software at the
|
||
|
lowest level. Physical pixels is the "least common denominator", and
|
||
|
is useful for computing sixel positions.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT340?
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI P ... P ' {
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSLE
|
||
|
Description: Select locator events
|
||
|
|
||
|
The locator events which are allowed to generate unsolicited reports
|
||
|
may be individually selected using the Select Locator Events
|
||
|
control. The locator is capable of reporting both up and down
|
||
|
transitions for those situations where the exact sequence of button
|
||
|
activiations is significant. This control allows application software
|
||
|
to select which events it wants reported.
|
||
|
|
||
|
P...P is one or more selective parameters which may assume the
|
||
|
following values:
|
||
|
|
||
|
0 respond only to explicit host requests
|
||
|
(default, also cancels any pending filter rectangle)
|
||
|
1 report button down transitions
|
||
|
2 do not report button down transitions
|
||
|
3 report button up transitions
|
||
|
4 do not report button up transitions
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT340?
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps ' |
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRQLP
|
||
|
Description: Request locator position
|
||
|
|
||
|
The host may explicitly request a locator position report any time
|
||
|
locator reporting is enabled (DECELR). Upon receiving such a request,
|
||
|
the terminal will immediately send a single locator report (DECLRP)
|
||
|
with event code 1 indicating the current locator position.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the session receiving the request is the active session, but the
|
||
|
locator is not within the defined coordinate range for that session,
|
||
|
the terminal will respond with omitted coordinates (locator position
|
||
|
undefined).
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the session receiving the request is not currently active (the
|
||
|
locator is being used in another session), the report will specify
|
||
|
event code 0 (locator unavailable). Locator state from the active
|
||
|
session should not be made available to inactive sessions.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the locator is disabled (DECELR), the terminal should still respond
|
||
|
with event code 0 (to avoid timing out the application).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Ps:
|
||
|
0 (or omitted) default to 1
|
||
|
1 transmit a single DECLRP locator report all others ignored
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT340?
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... ' }
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECIC
|
||
|
Description: Insert column
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... ' ~
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECDC
|
||
|
Description: Delete column
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... * q
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSRC
|
||
|
Descripton: Secure reset confirmation
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps * x
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSACE
|
||
|
Description: Select attribute change extent
|
||
|
|
||
|
Select which character positions within a rectangular area can have
|
||
|
their attributes changed or reversed. The DECSACE control function
|
||
|
affects the rectangular area control functions for changing and
|
||
|
reversing attributes (DECCARA and DECRARA).
|
||
|
|
||
|
The Ps parameter specifies what character positions are affected. 0 or
|
||
|
1 indicates a stream of character positions that begins in the first
|
||
|
position specified in the DECCARA or DECRARA control function, and
|
||
|
ends with the second one that is specified. A 2 indicates a
|
||
|
rectangular area of character positions; the DECCARA and DECRARA
|
||
|
control functions specify the upper left and lower right corners of
|
||
|
the area.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 ; Pn6 * y
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRQCRA
|
||
|
Description: Request checksum of rectangular area
|
||
|
|
||
|
Request a memory checksum of a rectangular area on a specified
|
||
|
page. The terminal returns a checksum report (DECCKSR) in
|
||
|
response. DECRQCRA also works on the status line.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameters:
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn1 A numeric label you give to identify the checksum request
|
||
|
(DECCKSR returns this number).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn2 The number of the page on which the rectangular area is
|
||
|
located. If Pn2 is 0 or omitted, the terminal ignores the remaining
|
||
|
parameters and reports a checksum for all pages in page memory. If
|
||
|
<n2> is more than the number of pages, Reflection does a checksum on
|
||
|
the last page.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn3 to Pn6 define the area to be checksummed:
|
||
|
|
||
|
Pn3 Top row
|
||
|
Pn4 Right column
|
||
|
Pn5 Bottom row
|
||
|
Pn6 Left column
|
||
|
|
||
|
If Pn3 .. Pn6 are omitted, the entire page is checksummed. The
|
||
|
co-ordinates are affected by DECOM.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Pn * z
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECINVM
|
||
|
Description: Invoke Macro
|
||
|
|
||
|
Invoke a stored macro. Pn is the macro ID number used in DECDMAC. If
|
||
|
Pn is not associated with a particular macro, Reflection ignores this
|
||
|
control function. If a macro definition includes control functions,
|
||
|
these functions remain in effect after the macro is invoked.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... * {
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECMSR
|
||
|
Description: Macro space report
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... * |
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSNLS
|
||
|
Description: Select number of lines per screen
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... * }
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECLFKC
|
||
|
Description: Local function key control
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL: http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... + p
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSR
|
||
|
Description: Secure reset
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... + q
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECELF
|
||
|
Description: Enable local functions
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... + r
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSMKR
|
||
|
Description: Select modifier key reporting
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI ... + v
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECMM
|
||
|
Description: Memory management
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; PPL3
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: CSI Ps / y
|
||
|
Description: xwsh command
|
||
|
|
||
|
xwsh command. The first parameter to this escape sequence is the
|
||
|
particular command described in the table that follows. Each command
|
||
|
has different numbers of arguments which are described below.
|
||
|
|
||
|
2 Textport init. Reset xwsh to be 40 rows by 80 columns. Reset the
|
||
|
colors to the default colors. Reset any graphics rendition. Clear
|
||
|
out the retain buffer. Home the cursor.
|
||
|
|
||
|
3 Push the window. Depending on the window manager, this may or may
|
||
|
not have any affect.
|
||
|
|
||
|
4 Pop the window. Depending on the window manager, this may or may not
|
||
|
have any affect.
|
||
|
|
||
|
14 History init. Clear out the retain buffer. Home the cursor.
|
||
|
|
||
|
16 Reset bindable function keys.
|
||
|
|
||
|
15 Initialize bindable function keys to defaults.
|
||
|
|
||
|
101 Set the text color by using a 3.3 compatible index.
|
||
|
|
||
|
102 Set the page color by using a 3.3 compatible index.
|
||
|
|
||
|
103 Set the bold color by using a 3.3 compatible index.
|
||
|
|
||
|
104 Set the cursor page color by using a 3.3 compatible index.
|
||
|
|
||
|
111 Set the selection colors by using 3.3 compatible indices. This
|
||
|
sequence takes three parameters. The first is 111. The second
|
||
|
parameter is the selection text color, the third is the selection
|
||
|
page color.
|
||
|
|
||
|
203 Set the window size by row and column. This sequence takes three
|
||
|
parameters. The first is 203. The second parameter is the number
|
||
|
of rows to use. The third parameter is the number of columns to
|
||
|
use.
|
||
|
|
||
|
204 Set the window size, in pixels. This sequence takes three
|
||
|
parameters. The first is 204. The second parameter is the new
|
||
|
width. The third parameter is the new height. The width and height
|
||
|
are rounded up to the nearest font boundaries.
|
||
|
|
||
|
205 Set the window position, in pixels. The lower left corner of the
|
||
|
display is specified as 0,0.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
|
||
|
Status: SGI private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: ST or ESC \
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ST
|
||
|
Description: String terminator
|
||
|
|
||
|
ST is used as the closing delimiter of a control string opened by
|
||
|
APPLICATION PROGRAM COMMAND (APC), DEVICE CONTROL STRING (DCS),
|
||
|
OPERATING SYSTEM COMMAND (OSC), PRIVACY MESSAGE (PM), or START OF
|
||
|
STRING (SOS).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.143
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: OSC or ESC ]
|
||
|
Mnemonic: OSC
|
||
|
Description: Operating system command
|
||
|
|
||
|
OSC is used as the opening delimiter of a control string for operating
|
||
|
system use. The command string following may consist of a sequence of
|
||
|
bit combinations in the range 00/08 to 00/13 and 02/00 to 07/14. The
|
||
|
control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING
|
||
|
TERMINATOR (ST). The interpretation of the command string depends on
|
||
|
the relevant operating system.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.89
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: OSC 0 ; txt BEL (or ST)
|
||
|
Description: Set icon name and window title
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: OSC 1 ; txt BEL (or ST)
|
||
|
Description: Set icon name
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: OSC 2 ; txt BEL (or ST)
|
||
|
Description: Set window title
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: OSC 4 6 ; name BEL (or ST)
|
||
|
Description: Set log file
|
||
|
|
||
|
Change log file to name (normally disabled by a compile-time option)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: OSC 5 0 ; fn BEl (or ST)
|
||
|
Description: Set font
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: OSC P nrrggbb
|
||
|
Description: Set palette
|
||
|
|
||
|
set palette, with parameter given in 7 hexadecimal digits after the
|
||
|
final P :-(. Here n is the color (0-16), and rrggbb indicates the
|
||
|
red/green/blue values (0-255).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: Linux private; should be terminated with ST
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Dequence: OSC R
|
||
|
Description: Reset palette
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: Linux private; should be terminated with ST
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: PM or ESC ^
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PM
|
||
|
Description: Privacy message
|
||
|
|
||
|
PM is used as the opening delimiter of a control string for privacy
|
||
|
message use. The command string following may consist of a sequence of
|
||
|
bit combinations in the range 00/08 to 00/13 and 02/00 to 07/14. The
|
||
|
control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING
|
||
|
TERMINATOR (ST). The interpretation of the command string depends on
|
||
|
the relevant privacy discipline.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.94
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Sequence: APC or ESC _
|
||
|
Mnemonic: APC
|
||
|
Description: Application program command
|
||
|
|
||
|
APC is used as the opening delimiter of a control string for
|
||
|
application program use. The command string following may consist of
|
||
|
bit combinations in the range 00/08 to 00/13 and 02/00 to 07/14. The
|
||
|
control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING
|
||
|
TERMINATOR (ST). The interpretation of the command string depends on
|
||
|
the relevant application program.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 8.3.2
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Section: *** Modes (for SM and RM) ***
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 1
|
||
|
Mnemonic: GATM
|
||
|
Description: Guarded area transfer mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
GUARD (reset):
|
||
|
Only the contents of unguarded areas in an eligible area are
|
||
|
transmitted or transferred.
|
||
|
|
||
|
ALL (set):
|
||
|
The contents of guarded as well as of unguarded areas in an eligible
|
||
|
area are transmitted or transferred.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
No control functions are affected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.7
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 2
|
||
|
Mnemonic: KAM
|
||
|
Description: Keyboard action mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
ENABLED (reset):
|
||
|
All or part of the manual input facilities are enabled to be used.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DISABLED (set):
|
||
|
All or part of the manual input facilities are disabled.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
No control functions are affected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.11
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 3
|
||
|
Mnemonic: CRM
|
||
|
Description: Control representation mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
CONTROL (reset):
|
||
|
All control functions are performed as defined; the way formator
|
||
|
functions are processed depends on the setting of the FORMAT EFFECTOR
|
||
|
ACTION MODE (FEAM). A device may choose to image the graphical
|
||
|
representations of control functions in addition to performing them.
|
||
|
|
||
|
GRAPHIC (set):
|
||
|
All control functions, except RESET MODE (RM), are treated as graphic
|
||
|
characters. A device may choose to perform some control functions in
|
||
|
addition to storing them and imaging their graphical representations.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
All control functions, except RM, are affected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.2
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 4
|
||
|
Mnemonic: IRM
|
||
|
Description: Insertion replacement mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
REPLACE (reset):
|
||
|
The graphic symbol of a graphic character or of a control function,
|
||
|
for which a graphical representation is required, replaces (or,
|
||
|
depending upon the implementation, is combined with) the graphic
|
||
|
symbol imaged at the active presentation position.
|
||
|
|
||
|
INSERT (set):
|
||
|
The graphic symbol of a graphic character or of a control function,
|
||
|
for which a graphical representation is required, is inserted at the
|
||
|
active presentation position.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
Only control functions for which a graphical representation is
|
||
|
required are affected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.10
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 5
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SRTM
|
||
|
Description: Status report transfer mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
NORMAL (reset):
|
||
|
Status reports in the form of DEVICE CONTROL STRINGs (DCS) are not
|
||
|
generated automatically.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DIAGNOSTIC (set):
|
||
|
Status reports in the form of DEVICE CONTROL STRINGs (DCS) are
|
||
|
included in every data stream transmitted or transferred.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
No control functions are affected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.16
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 6
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ERM
|
||
|
Description: Erasure mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
PROTECT (reset):
|
||
|
Only the contents of unprotected areas are affected by an erasure
|
||
|
control function.
|
||
|
|
||
|
ALL (set):
|
||
|
The contents of protected as well as of unprotected areas are affected
|
||
|
by an erasure control function.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
Control functions affected are: EA, ECH, ED, EF, EL.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.4
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 7
|
||
|
Mnemonic: VEM
|
||
|
Description: Line editing mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
FOLLOWING (reset):
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, a
|
||
|
line insertion causes the contents of the active line (the line that
|
||
|
contains the active presentation position) and of the following lines
|
||
|
in the presentation component to be shifted in the direction of the
|
||
|
line progression; a line deletion causes the contents of the lines
|
||
|
following the active line to be shifted in the direction opposite to
|
||
|
that of the line progression.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, a line
|
||
|
insertion causes the contents of the active line (the line that
|
||
|
contains the active data position) and of the following lines in the
|
||
|
data component to be shifted in the direction of the line progression;
|
||
|
a line deletion causes the contents of the lines following the active
|
||
|
line to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the line
|
||
|
progression.
|
||
|
|
||
|
PRECEDING (set):
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, a
|
||
|
line insertion causes the contents of the active line (the line that
|
||
|
contains the active presentation position) and of the preceding lines
|
||
|
to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the line
|
||
|
progression; a line deletion causes the contents of the lines
|
||
|
preceding the active line to be shifted in the direction of the line
|
||
|
progression.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, a line
|
||
|
insertion causes the contents of the active line (the line that
|
||
|
contains the active data position) and of the preceding lines to be
|
||
|
shifted in the direction opposite to that of the line progression; a
|
||
|
line deletion causes the contents of the lines preceding the active
|
||
|
line to be shifted in the direction of the line progression.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
Control functions affected are: DL, IL.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.19
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 8
|
||
|
Mnemonic: BDSM
|
||
|
Description: Bi-directional support mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
EXPLICIT (reset):
|
||
|
Control functions are performed in the data component or in the
|
||
|
presentation component, depending on the setting of the DEVICE
|
||
|
COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM).
|
||
|
|
||
|
IMPLICIT (set):
|
||
|
Control functions are performed in the data component. All
|
||
|
bi-directional aspects of data are handled by the device itself.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.1
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 9
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DCSM
|
||
|
Description: Device component select mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
PRESENTATION (reset):
|
||
|
Certain control functions are performed in the presentation
|
||
|
component. The active presentation position (or the active line, where
|
||
|
applicable) in the presentation component is the reference position
|
||
|
against which the relevant control functions are performed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DATA (set):
|
||
|
Certain control functions are performed in the data component. The
|
||
|
active data position (or the active line, where applicable) in the
|
||
|
data component is the reference position against which the relevant
|
||
|
control functions are performed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
Control functions affected are: CPR, CR, DCH, DL, EA, ECH, ED, EF, EL,
|
||
|
ICH, IL, LF, NEL, RI, SLH, SLL, SPH, SPL.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.3
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 10
|
||
|
Mnemonic: HEM
|
||
|
Description: Character editing mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
FOLLOWING (reset):
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, a
|
||
|
character insertion causes the contents of the active presentation
|
||
|
position and of the following character positions in the presentation
|
||
|
component to be shifted in the direction of the character path; a
|
||
|
character deletion causes the contents of the character positions
|
||
|
following the active presentation position to be shifted in the
|
||
|
direction opposite to that of the character path.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, a character
|
||
|
insertion causes the contents of the active data position and of the
|
||
|
following character positions in the data component to be shifted in
|
||
|
the direction of the character progression; a character deletion
|
||
|
causes the contents of the character positions following the active
|
||
|
data position to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the
|
||
|
character progression.
|
||
|
|
||
|
PRECEDING:
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, a
|
||
|
character insertion causes the contents of the active presentation
|
||
|
position and of the following character positions in the presentation
|
||
|
component to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the
|
||
|
character path; a character deletion causes the contents of the
|
||
|
character positions following the active presentation position to be
|
||
|
shifted in the direction of the character path.
|
||
|
|
||
|
If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, a character
|
||
|
insertion causes the contents of the active data position and of
|
||
|
preceding character positions in the data component to be shifted in
|
||
|
the direction opposite to that of the character progression; a
|
||
|
character deletion causes the contents of the character positions
|
||
|
preceding the active data position to be shifted in the direction of
|
||
|
the character progression.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
Control functions affected are: DCH, ICH.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.9
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 11
|
||
|
Mnemonic: PUM
|
||
|
Description: Positioning unit mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
CHARACTER (reset):
|
||
|
The unit for numeric parameters of the positioning format effectors is
|
||
|
one character position.
|
||
|
|
||
|
SIZE (set):
|
||
|
The unit for numeric parameters of the positioning format effectors is
|
||
|
that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE 1
|
||
|
Control functions affected are: CUB, CUD, CUF, CUU, HPA, HPB, HPR,
|
||
|
HVP, SLH, SLL, SSU, VPA, VPB, VPR..
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE 2
|
||
|
As the default parameter value of the control function SELECT SIZE
|
||
|
UNIT (SSU) is CHARACTER, this mode is redundant and should no longer
|
||
|
be used.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.4.1
|
||
|
Status: standard; deprecated
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 12
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SRM
|
||
|
Description: Send/receive mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
MONITOR (reset):
|
||
|
Data which are locally entered are immediately imaged.
|
||
|
|
||
|
SIMULTANEOUS:
|
||
|
Local input facilities are logically disconnected from the output
|
||
|
mechanism; only data which are sent to the device are imaged.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
No control functions are affected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.15
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 13
|
||
|
Mnemonic: FEAM
|
||
|
Description: Format effector action mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
EXECUTE (reset):
|
||
|
Formator functions are performed immediately and may be stored in
|
||
|
addition to being performed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
STORE (set):
|
||
|
Formator functions are stored but not performed. In this case, the
|
||
|
specified action is intended to be performed by another device when
|
||
|
the associated data are transmitted or transferred.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
Control functions affected are: BPH, BS, CR, DTA, FF, FNT, GCC, GSM,
|
||
|
GSS, HPA, HPB, HPR, HT, HTJ, HTS, HVP, JFY, NEL, PEC, PFS, PLD, PLU,
|
||
|
PPA, PPB, PPR, PTX, QUAD, RI, SACS, SAPV, SCO, SCS, SGR, SHS, SLH,
|
||
|
SLL, SLS, SPD, SPI, SPQR, SRCS, SRS, SSU, SSW, STAB, SVS, TAC, TALE,
|
||
|
TATE, TBC, TCC, TSS, VPA, VPB, VPR, VTS.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.5
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 14
|
||
|
Mnemonic: FETM
|
||
|
Description: Format effector transfer mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
INSERT (reset):
|
||
|
Formator functions may be inserted in a data stream to be transmitted
|
||
|
or in data to be transferred to an auxiliary input/output device.
|
||
|
|
||
|
EXCLUDE:
|
||
|
No formator functions other than those received while the FORMAT
|
||
|
EFFECTOR ACTION MODE (FEAM) is set to STORE are included in a
|
||
|
transmitted data stream or in data transferred to an auxiliary
|
||
|
input/output device.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
No control functions are affected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.6
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 15
|
||
|
Mnemonic: MATM
|
||
|
Description: Multiple area transfer mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
SINGLE (reset):
|
||
|
Only the contents of the selected area which contains the active
|
||
|
presentation position are eligible to be transmitted or transferred.
|
||
|
|
||
|
MULTIPLE (set):
|
||
|
The contents of all selected areas are eligible to be transmitted or
|
||
|
transferred.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
No control functions are affected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.12
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 16
|
||
|
Mnemonic: TTM
|
||
|
Description: Transfer termination mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
CURSOR (reset):
|
||
|
Only the contents of the character positions preceding the active
|
||
|
presentation position in the presentation component are eligible to be
|
||
|
transmitted or transferred.
|
||
|
|
||
|
ALL (set):
|
||
|
The contents of character positions preceding, following, and at the
|
||
|
active presentation position are eligible to be transmitted or
|
||
|
transferred.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
No control functions are affected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.18
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 17
|
||
|
Mnemonic: SATM
|
||
|
Description: Selected area transfer mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
SELECT (reset):
|
||
|
Only the contents of selected areas are eligible to be transmitted or
|
||
|
transferred.
|
||
|
|
||
|
ALL (set):
|
||
|
The contents of all character positions, irrespective of any
|
||
|
explicitly defined selected areas, are eligible to be transmitted or
|
||
|
transferred.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
No control functions are affected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.14
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 18
|
||
|
Mnemonic: TSM
|
||
|
Description: Tabulation stop mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
MULTIPLE (reset):
|
||
|
Character tabulation stops in the presentation component are set or
|
||
|
cleared in the active line (the line that contains the active
|
||
|
presentation position) and in the corresponding character positions of
|
||
|
the preceding lines and of the following lines.
|
||
|
|
||
|
SINGLE (set):
|
||
|
Character tabulation stops in the presentation component are set or
|
||
|
cleared in the active line only.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
Control functions affected are: CTC, DL, HTS, IL, TBC.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.17
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 19
|
||
|
Mnemonic: EBM
|
||
|
Description: Editing boundary mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
The mode EDITING BOUNDARY MODE (EBM) the use of which was already
|
||
|
declared deprecated in the fourth Edition of this Standard has now
|
||
|
been removed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.5.1
|
||
|
Status: standard; obsolete
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 20
|
||
|
Mnemonic: LNM
|
||
|
Description: Line feed/new line mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
The mode LINE FEED/NEW LINE MODE (LF/NL) the use of which was already
|
||
|
declared deprecated in the fourth Edition of this Standard has now
|
||
|
been removed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.5.2
|
||
|
|
||
|
set: Causes a received LF, FF, or VT code to move the cursor to the
|
||
|
first column of the next line. RETURN transmits both a CR and a LF
|
||
|
code.
|
||
|
|
||
|
reset: Causes a received LF, FF, or VT code to move the cursor to the
|
||
|
next line in the current column. RETURN transmits a CR code only.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
|
||
|
Status: standard; obsolete
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 21
|
||
|
Mnemonic: GRCM
|
||
|
Description: Graphic rendition combination mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
REPLACING (reset):
|
||
|
Each occurrence of the control function SELECT GRAPHIC RENDITION (SGR)
|
||
|
cancels the effect of any preceding occurrence. Any graphic rendition
|
||
|
aspects that are to remain unchanged after an occurrence of SGR have
|
||
|
to be re-specified by that SGR.
|
||
|
|
||
|
CUMULATIVE (set):
|
||
|
Each occurrence of the control function SELECT GRAPHIC RENDITION (SGR)
|
||
|
causes only those graphic rendition aspects to be changed that are
|
||
|
specified by that SGR. All other graphic rendition aspects remain
|
||
|
unchanged.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE
|
||
|
Control function affected is SGR.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.8
|
||
|
Status: standard
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 22
|
||
|
Mnemonic: ZDM
|
||
|
Description: Zero default mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
ZERO (reset):
|
||
|
A parameter value of 0 of a control function means the number 0.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DEFAULT (set):
|
||
|
A parameter value of 0 represents a default parameter value which may
|
||
|
be different from 0.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE 1
|
||
|
This mode was provided for implementations of the first edition of
|
||
|
this Standard which specified that "an empty parameter sub-string or a
|
||
|
parameter sub-string which consists of bit combinations 03/00 only
|
||
|
represents a default value which depends on the control function".
|
||
|
|
||
|
For numeric parameters which are expressed in units established by the
|
||
|
parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU) the value 0 could then be
|
||
|
specified. For numeric parameters which are effectively repeat counts,
|
||
|
a 0 parameter value corresponded to a "no-op". In either instance,
|
||
|
non-negative computed numeric parameter values might have been used
|
||
|
without treating 0 as a special (unusable) case.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Where an explicit parameter value was not used, implementors were
|
||
|
urged to omit a parameter value (use an empty parameter sub-string) to
|
||
|
imply a default parameter value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Control functions affected are: CBT, CHA, CHT, CNL, CPL, CPR, CUB,
|
||
|
CUD, CUF, CUP, CUU, CVT, DCH, DL, ECH, GSM, HPA, HPB, HPR, HVP, ICH,
|
||
|
IL, NP, PP, PPA, PPB, PPR, REP, SD, SL, SR, SU, TCC, VPA, VPB, VPR.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE 2
|
||
|
Since the publication of the first edition of this Standard in 1976
|
||
|
almost 15 years have expired. The use of this mode should no longer be
|
||
|
required because the definition of default parameter values has been
|
||
|
changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.4.2
|
||
|
Status: standard; deprecated
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 30
|
||
|
Description: Display disable mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
|
||
|
Status: Wyse private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 31
|
||
|
Description: Status line display mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
|
||
|
Status: Wyse private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 32
|
||
|
Description: Steady cursor mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
|
||
|
Status: Wyse private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 33
|
||
|
Mnemonic: WYSTCURM
|
||
|
Description: Wyse steady cursor mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Cursor steady: <esc> [ 33 h
|
||
|
Cursor blinking: <esc> [ 33 l (that's a small ell, not eye)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source:
|
||
|
<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: Wyse private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 34
|
||
|
Mnemonic: WYULCURM
|
||
|
Description: Wyse underline cursor mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Cursor block: <esc> [ 34 l (ell)
|
||
|
Cursor line: <esc> [ 34 h
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source:
|
||
|
<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: Wyse private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 35
|
||
|
Description: Width change clear mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
|
||
|
Status: Wyse private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: 53
|
||
|
Description: 80/132 column switch
|
||
|
|
||
|
set: 132 columns
|
||
|
reset: 80 columns
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: jaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals
|
||
|
<7svop9$f9u$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>
|
||
|
Status: Siemens 97801-5xx private; clashes with ECMA-48
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: <0
|
||
|
Description: Roll mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
When reset, commands that would move the cursor beyond the 24th line
|
||
|
of the screen cause the screen to scroll. When set, such commands
|
||
|
cause the cursor to move to the top line.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
|
||
|
<URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
|
||
|
Status: Data General private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: <1
|
||
|
Description: Blink mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
When set, the blink attribute in CSR will be ignored.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
|
||
|
<URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
|
||
|
Status: Data General private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: <2
|
||
|
Description: Horizontal scroll mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set: Horizontal scroll enabled
|
||
|
reset: Horizontal scroll disabled
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
|
||
|
<URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
|
||
|
Status: Data General private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: <3
|
||
|
Description: DG/ANSI mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set: Use ANSI command sequences.
|
||
|
reset: Use DG command sequences.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
|
||
|
<URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
|
||
|
Status: Data General private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: <4
|
||
|
Description: Forms mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
When reset, a Local Print command will print all characters. When
|
||
|
set, only characters displayed at full intensity will be printed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
|
||
|
<URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
|
||
|
Status: Data General private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: <5
|
||
|
Description: Margins mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
In the reset state, editing operations operate irrespective of
|
||
|
margins; in the set state, editing operations take place within the
|
||
|
margins. The commands affected include: IL, ED, EL, ICH DCH.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
|
||
|
<URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
|
||
|
Status: Data General private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: =6
|
||
|
Description: Lock display
|
||
|
|
||
|
Lock display. When set, this mode causes xwsh to keep its display set
|
||
|
to the current location in the retain buffer. Any scrolling
|
||
|
activities, line insert/deletes will not affect the retain buffer that
|
||
|
is outside of the display. When reset, scrolling off the bottom will
|
||
|
move the display to track the bottom of the retain buffer. When the
|
||
|
lock is set, the scroll bar is disabled, as well as any extend
|
||
|
selection mechanisms that might cause a scroll. The normal mode is in
|
||
|
the reset state, but the standard terminfo for iris-ansi causes visual
|
||
|
programs to lock the display.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
|
||
|
Status: SGI private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: =9
|
||
|
Description: Enable visual bell
|
||
|
|
||
|
Enable visual bell. When set, xwsh will flash the display when it
|
||
|
receives an octal 7 instead of ringing the bell. When reset it asks X
|
||
|
to ring the bell.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
|
||
|
Status: SGI private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: =12
|
||
|
Description: Overlay mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Overlay mode. When set, xwsh moves its display into the overlay
|
||
|
planes. When reset, xwsh displays in the default visual. This is no
|
||
|
longer functional as of IRIX 4.0. The escape sequence is now ignored.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
|
||
|
Status: SGI private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECCKM
|
||
|
Description: Cursor key mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control requences. This
|
||
|
mode is only effective when the terminal is in keypad application mode
|
||
|
(DECPAM) and the ANSI/VT52 mode (DECANM) is set. Under these
|
||
|
conditions, if this mode is reset, the cursor keys will send ANSI
|
||
|
cursor control commands. If setm the cursor keys will send application
|
||
|
function commands.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
|
||
|
DECCKM (default off): When set, the cursor keys send an ESC O prefix,
|
||
|
rather than ESC [.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Linux console_codes(4)
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?2
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECANM
|
||
|
Description: ANSI/VT52 Mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control sequences. The
|
||
|
reset state causes only VT52 compatible escape sequences to be
|
||
|
recognized. The set state causes only ANSI compatible escape sequences
|
||
|
to be recognized.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?3
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECCOLM
|
||
|
Description: Column mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control sequences. The
|
||
|
reset state causes an 80 column screen to be used. The set state
|
||
|
causes a 132 column screen to be used.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE: When the terminal receives the sequence, the screen is erased
|
||
|
and the cursor moves to the home position. This also sets the scrolling
|
||
|
region for full screen (24 lines).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html#S4.6.10>
|
||
|
|
||
|
If you change the DECCOLM setting, the terminal:
|
||
|
+ Sets the left, right, top and bottom scrolling margins to their default
|
||
|
positions.
|
||
|
+ Erases all data in page memory, unless DECNCSM is set; then, the page
|
||
|
is not erased.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DECCOLM resets vertical split screen mode (DECLRMM) to unavailable.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DECCOLM clears data from the status line if the status line is set to
|
||
|
host-writable.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <http://vt100.net/docs/vt520-rm/ek-vt520-rm.pdf>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?4
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSCLM
|
||
|
Description: Scrolling mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is a private parameter to RM and SM control sequences. The reset
|
||
|
state causes scrolls to "jump" instantaneuously one line at a time.
|
||
|
The set state causes the scrolls to be "smooth", and scrolls at a
|
||
|
maximum rate of six lines/sec.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?5
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSCNM
|
||
|
Description: Screen mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is a private parameter to RM and SM control sequences. The reset
|
||
|
state causes the screen to be black with white characters; the set
|
||
|
state causes the screen to be white with black characters.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?6
|
||
|
Mnemoic: DECOM
|
||
|
Description: Origin mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is a private parameter to SM and RM control sequences. The reset
|
||
|
state causes the origin (or home position) to be the upper left
|
||
|
character position of the screen. Line and column numbers are,
|
||
|
therefore, independent of current margin settings. The cursor may be
|
||
|
positioned outside the margins with a cursor position (CUP) or
|
||
|
horizontal and vertical position (HVP) control.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The set state causes the origin to be at the upper left character
|
||
|
position within the current margins. Line and column numbers are,
|
||
|
therefore, relative to the current margin settings. The cursor cannot
|
||
|
be positioned outside of the margins.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The cursor is moved to the new home position when this mode is set or
|
||
|
reset. Lines and columns are numbered consecutively, with the origin
|
||
|
being line 1, column 1.
|
||
|
|
||
|
The scroll margins are set using the DECSTBM control sequence.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?7
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECAWM
|
||
|
Description: Autowrap mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control sequences. The
|
||
|
reset state prevents the cursor from moving when characters are
|
||
|
recieved while at the right margin. The set state causes these
|
||
|
characters to advance to the next line, causing a scroll up if required
|
||
|
and permitted. See MODES, SM, and RM.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?8
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECARM
|
||
|
Description: Auto repeat mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control sequences. The
|
||
|
reset state causes no keyboard keys to auto-repeat, the set state
|
||
|
causes most of them to.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?9
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECINLM
|
||
|
Description: Interlace mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
This is a private parameter to the RM and SM control sequences. The
|
||
|
reset state (non-interlace) causes the video processor to display 240
|
||
|
scan lines per frame. The set state causes the video processor to
|
||
|
display 480 scan lines per screen. See MODES, RM, and SM.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT100
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?9
|
||
|
Description: X10 mouse reporting
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameters (such as pointer position and button number) for all mouse
|
||
|
tracking escape sequences generated by xterm encode numeric parameters
|
||
|
in a single character as value+32. For example, ! specifies the value
|
||
|
1. The upper left character position on the terminal is denoted as 1,1.
|
||
|
|
||
|
X10 compatibility mode sends an escape sequence only on button press,
|
||
|
encoding the location and the mouse button pressed. It is enabled by
|
||
|
specifying parameter 9 to DECSET. On button press, xterm sends CSI M
|
||
|
CbCxCy (6 characters). Cb is button-1. Cx and Cy are the x and y coor-
|
||
|
dinates of the mouse when the button was pressed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?10
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECEDM
|
||
|
Description: Editing mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Edit
|
||
|
reset -> Interactive
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT131
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?11
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECLTM
|
||
|
Description: Line Transmit mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> On
|
||
|
reset -> Off
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT131
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?13
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSCFDM
|
||
|
Description: Space compression/field delimiter mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> On
|
||
|
reset -> Off
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT131
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?14
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECTEM
|
||
|
Description: Transmit execution mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Immediate
|
||
|
reset -> Deferred
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT131
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?16
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECEKEM
|
||
|
Description: Edit key execution mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Immediate
|
||
|
reset -> Deferred
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT131
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?18
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECPFF
|
||
|
Description: Print form feed mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set: Selects form feed (FF) as print termination character. The
|
||
|
terminal transmits this character to the printer after each print
|
||
|
screen operation.
|
||
|
|
||
|
reset: Select no termination character. The terminal does not transmit
|
||
|
a form feed (FF) to the printer after each print screen operation.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?19
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECPEX
|
||
|
Description: Printer extent
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> screen
|
||
|
reset -> scrolling region
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?24
|
||
|
Description: Print density
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Sets printing to low density operation
|
||
|
reset -> Sets printing to high density operation
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE21
|
||
|
Status: DEC private, LA12
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?25
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECTCEM
|
||
|
Description: Text cursor enable mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> visible
|
||
|
reset -> invisible
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?27
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECPSP
|
||
|
Description: Proportional spacing
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> sets proportional spacing
|
||
|
reset -> clears proportional spacing
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE99
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LQP02
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?29
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECPSM
|
||
|
Description: Pitch select mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Sets pitch select mode to current DPS pitches mode
|
||
|
reset -> Sets pitch select mode to all pitches mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?30
|
||
|
Description: Scroll bar mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Show scrollbar
|
||
|
reset -> Don't show scrollbar
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: rxvt private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?34
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECRLM
|
||
|
Description: Writing
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> right to left
|
||
|
reset -> left to right
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?35
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECHEBM
|
||
|
|
||
|
(Kermit) Invoke macro: KEYBOARDS KEYBOARDR
|
||
|
+++ VT320 DEC supplements for Hebrew systems adapted
|
||
|
from VT420-Hebrew terminals, invokes a new
|
||
|
keyboard map. Kermit invokes macros above.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?35
|
||
|
Description: Shifted key-functions
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Enable shifted key-functions
|
||
|
reset -> Disable shifted key-functions
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: rxvt private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?36
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECHEM
|
||
|
Description: Hebrew encoding
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Multinational
|
||
|
reset -> Hebrew NRC
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?38
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECTEK
|
||
|
Description: Graphics (Tek)
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Enter Tektromix mode
|
||
|
reset -> [ not possible ]
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: DEC? private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?40
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECCRNLM
|
||
|
Description: Carriage return/new line mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Enables LF to go with CR
|
||
|
reset -> Disables (default)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE107
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; printers
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?40
|
||
|
Description: Column switch control
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Allow 80 <-> 132 mode
|
||
|
reset -> Disallow 80 <-> 132 mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?41
|
||
|
Description: print direction
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Prints from left to right
|
||
|
reset -> Prints bidirectionally
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE41
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LA210
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?41
|
||
|
Description: more(1) fix
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> This option indicates that xterm should work
|
||
|
around a bug in the more(1) program that causes it
|
||
|
to incorrectly display lines that are exactly the
|
||
|
width of the window and are followed by a line
|
||
|
beginning with a tab (the leading tabs are not
|
||
|
displayed).
|
||
|
|
||
|
reset -> This option indicates that xterm should not work
|
||
|
around the more(1) bug mentioned above.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/programs/xterm/xterm.man,v 3.52 1999/09/27 06:30:25
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?42
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECNRCM
|
||
|
Description: Nat Repl Char
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> enable
|
||
|
reset -> disable
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?43
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECGEPM
|
||
|
Description: Expanded/compressed print mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Select an expanded image for a graphics print screen.
|
||
|
reset -> Select a compressed image for a graphics print screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?44
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECGPCM
|
||
|
Description: Print color/black and white mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Send a color image to the printer for a graphics print screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
reset -> Send a black and white image to the printer for a graphics
|
||
|
print screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?44
|
||
|
Description: Margin bell
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Turn on margin bell
|
||
|
reset -> Turn off margin bell
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?45
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECGPCS
|
||
|
Description: Print color syntax
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Select the RGB color format for a graphics print screen.
|
||
|
reset -> Select the HLS color format for a graphics print screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?45
|
||
|
Description: Reverse-wraparound mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Reverse-wraparound mode
|
||
|
reset -> No reverse-wraparound mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?46
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECGPBM
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Send the entire graphics image, including the background, to
|
||
|
the printer for a graphics print screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
reset -> Send the graphics image, except for the background, to the
|
||
|
printer for a graphics print screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
This applies only when the DECGPCM function is set to send a color image.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?46
|
||
|
Description: Logging mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Start logging (normally disabled by a compile-time option)
|
||
|
reset -> Stop logging
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?47
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECGRPM
|
||
|
Description: Print rotated/compressed mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Send a graphics image to the printer rotated 90 degrees.
|
||
|
|
||
|
reset -> Send a compressed image to the printer.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?47
|
||
|
Description: Alternate screen mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Use alternate screen buffer (unless disabled by the titeInhibit
|
||
|
resource)
|
||
|
reset -> Use normal screen buffer
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?51
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECBWRM
|
||
|
Description: Black/white reversal mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE123
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LCP01
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?52
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECOPM
|
||
|
Description: Origin placement mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Places origin to corner of paper
|
||
|
reset -> Places origin to corner of printable area (default)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE110
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LA100, LN03
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?55
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECBPM
|
||
|
Description: Bold page mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE123
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; LCP01
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?60
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECHCCM
|
||
|
Description: Horizontal cursor coupling
|
||
|
|
||
|
This control function determines whether the user window pans with the
|
||
|
cursor when the cursor moves past the right or left border of the user
|
||
|
window. DECHCCM is only useful when the width of the current user
|
||
|
window is narrower than the page. The cursor must stay on the current
|
||
|
page.
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Couple the cursor to the display. By default the cursor is
|
||
|
coupled to the display for horizontal movement. When the cursor moves
|
||
|
past the right or left border of the user window, the window pans to
|
||
|
keep the cursor in view. If the cursor moves past the left border of
|
||
|
the display, the user window pans to the left and new columns appear
|
||
|
at the right border of the window.
|
||
|
|
||
|
reset -> Uncouple the cursor from the display. If the cursor is
|
||
|
uncoupled from the display and is moved past the right or left border
|
||
|
of the user window, the cursor disappears from view.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?61
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECVCCM
|
||
|
Description: Vertical cursor coupling
|
||
|
|
||
|
This mode determines whether the user window pans with the cursor when
|
||
|
the cursor moves past the top or bottom border of the user
|
||
|
window. DECVCCM is only useful when the height of the current user
|
||
|
window is smaller than the page. The cursor must stay on the current
|
||
|
page.
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Couple the cursor to the display. By default the cursor is
|
||
|
coupled to the display for vertical movement. When the cursor moves
|
||
|
past the top or bottom border of the user window, the window pans to
|
||
|
keep the cursor in view. If the cursor moves past the top of the
|
||
|
display, the user window pans up and new lines appear at the top of
|
||
|
the screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
reset -> Uncouple the cursor from the display. If the cursor is
|
||
|
uncoupled from the display and is moved past the top or bottom border
|
||
|
of the user window, the cursor disappears from view.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?64
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECPCCM
|
||
|
|
||
|
This control function determines if a new page appears in the display
|
||
|
when the cursor moves to a new page. DECPCCM is only useful with a
|
||
|
multiple-page format.
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Couple the cursor to the display. By default the cursor is
|
||
|
coupled to the display when the cursor moves to a new page. The new
|
||
|
page appears in the display to keep the cursor in view.
|
||
|
|
||
|
reset -> Uncouple the cursor. If the cursor is uncoupled from the
|
||
|
display and is moved to a new page, the cursor disappears from view.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT400
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?66
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECNKM
|
||
|
Description: Numeric keypad
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> application
|
||
|
reset -> numeric
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?67
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECBKM
|
||
|
Description: Backspace/delete
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> <X| sends backspace
|
||
|
reset -> <X| sends delete
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_terminals_news.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private; VT320
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?68
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECKBUM
|
||
|
Description: Typewriter
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> data process
|
||
|
reset -> typewriter
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?80
|
||
|
Mnemonic: DECSDM
|
||
|
Description: Sixel scrolling
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> enable sixel scrolling (screen scrolls if sixel graphics hit bottom)
|
||
|
reset -> disable sixel scrolling
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
|
||
|
Status: DEC private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1000
|
||
|
Description: X11 normal mouse tracking
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parameters (such as pointer position and button number) for all mouse
|
||
|
tracking escape sequences generated by xterm encode numeric parameters
|
||
|
in a single character as value+32. For example, ! specifies the value
|
||
|
1. The upper left character position on the terminal is denoted as 1,1.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Normal tracking mode sends an escape sequence on both button press and
|
||
|
release. Modifier key (shift, ctrl, meta) information is also sent. It
|
||
|
is enabled by specifying parameter 1000 to DECSET. On button press or
|
||
|
release, xterm sends CSI M CbCxCy. The low two bits of Cb encode button
|
||
|
information: 0=MB1 pressed, 1=MB2 pressed, 2=MB3 pressed, 3=release.
|
||
|
The upper bits encode the modifiers which were down when the button was
|
||
|
pressed and are added together. 4=Shift, 8=Meta, 16=Control. Cx and Cy
|
||
|
are the x and y coordinates of the mouse event. The upper left corner
|
||
|
is (1,1).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1001
|
||
|
Description: X11 hilite mouse tracking
|
||
|
|
||
|
Mouse hilite tracking notifies a program of a button press, receives a
|
||
|
range of lines from the program, highlights the region covered by the
|
||
|
mouse within that range until button release, and then sends the program
|
||
|
the release coordinates. It is enabled by specifying parameter 1001 to
|
||
|
DECSET. Highlighting is performed only for button 1, though other but-
|
||
|
ton events can be received. Warning: use of this mode requires a coop-
|
||
|
erating program or it will hang xterm. On button press, the same infor-
|
||
|
mation as for normal tracking is generated; xterm then waits for the
|
||
|
program to send mouse tracking information. All X events are ignored
|
||
|
until the proper escape sequence is received from the pty: CSI Ps ; Ps ;
|
||
|
Ps ; Ps ; Ps T . The parameters are func, startx, starty, firstrow, and
|
||
|
lastrow. func is non-zero to initiate hilite tracking and zero to
|
||
|
abort. startx and starty give the starting x and y location for the
|
||
|
highlighted region. The ending location tracks the mouse, but will
|
||
|
never be above row firstrow and will always be above row lastrow. (The
|
||
|
top of the screen is row 1.) When the button is released, xterm reports
|
||
|
the ending position one of two ways: if the start and end coordinates
|
||
|
are valid text locations: CSI t CxCy. If either coordinate is past the
|
||
|
end of the line: CSI T CxCyCxCyCxCy. The parameters are startx, starty,
|
||
|
endx, endy, mousex, and mousey. startx, starty, endx, and endy give the
|
||
|
starting and ending character positions of the region. mousex and
|
||
|
mousey give the location of the mouse at button up, which may not be
|
||
|
over a character.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1002
|
||
|
Description: X11 button-event mouse tracking
|
||
|
|
||
|
Button-event tracking is essentially the same as normal tracking, but
|
||
|
xterm also reports button-motion events. Motion events are reported
|
||
|
only if the mouse pointer has moved to a different character cell. It
|
||
|
is enabled by specifying parameter 1002 to DECSET. On button press or
|
||
|
release, xterm sends the same codes used by normal tracking mode. On
|
||
|
button-motion events, xterm adds 4 to the event code (the third charac-
|
||
|
ter, Cb). The low two bits of the event code encode the button informa-
|
||
|
tion. The third bit is set to indicate motion. Additional bits specify
|
||
|
modifier keys as in normal mode. For example, motion into cell x,y with
|
||
|
button 1 down is reported as CSI M @ CxCy. ( @ = 32 + 0 (button 1) +
|
||
|
32 (motion indicator) ). Similarly, motion with button 3 down is
|
||
|
reported as CSI M B CxCy. ( B = 32 + 2 (button 3) + 32 (motion indica-
|
||
|
tor) ).
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1003
|
||
|
Description: X11 any-event mouse tracking
|
||
|
|
||
|
Any-event mode is the same as button-event mode, except that all motion
|
||
|
events are reported instead of just those that enter a new character
|
||
|
cell. It is enabled by specifying 1003 to DECSET.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1010
|
||
|
Description: Scroll to bottom on tty output
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Scroll to bottom on tty output
|
||
|
reset -> Don't scroll to bottom on tty output
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: rxvt private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1011
|
||
|
Description: Scroll to bottom on key press
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Scroll to bottom on key press
|
||
|
reset -> Don't scroll to bottom on key press
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: rxvt private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1035
|
||
|
Description: Special modifiers
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Enable special modifiers for Alt and NumLock keys
|
||
|
reset -> Disable special modifiers for Alt and NumLock keys
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1047
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Use alternate screen buffer (unless disabled by the titeInhibit
|
||
|
resource)
|
||
|
reset -> Use Normal Screen Buffer, clearing screen first if in the
|
||
|
Alternate Screen (unless disabled by the titeInhibit
|
||
|
resource)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1048
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Save cursor as in DECSC (unless disabled by the titeInhibit
|
||
|
resource)
|
||
|
reset -> Restore cursor as in DECRC (unless disabled by the
|
||
|
titeInhibit resource)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1049
|
||
|
|
||
|
set -> Save cursor as in DECSC and use Alternate Screen Buffer,
|
||
|
clearing it first (unless disabled by the titeInhibit resource)
|
||
|
reset -> Use Normal Screen Buffer and restore cursor as in DECRC (unless
|
||
|
disabled by the titeInhibit resource)
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1051
|
||
|
Description: Sun function-key mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1052
|
||
|
Description: HP function-key mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
Mode: ?1061
|
||
|
Description: Sun/PC keyboard mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
|
||
|
Status: xterm private
|
||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|